Sunteți pe pagina 1din 115

Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,

¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D,


D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max
Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

Contents
1. Purpose..........................................................................................................................................................................2
2. Structure of drive families.............................................................................................................................................2
3. Basic options for repair of Maxtor drives .....................................................................................................................3
4. Preparation for work .....................................................................................................................................................3
5. Utility usage ..................................................................................................................................................................4
5.1. Launching the utility ..............................................................................................................................................4
5.2. Utility menu structure ............................................................................................................................................4
5.2.1. Logical scanning ............................................................................................................................................... 4
5.2.2. Disc firmware zone ........................................................................................................................................... 5
5.2.3. Disc ID .............................................................................................................................................................. 6
5.2.4. Defects table...................................................................................................................................................... 6
5.2.5. SELF TEST mode............................................................................................................................................. 7
6. Firmware .......................................................................................................................................................................7
6.1. General information ...............................................................................................................................................7
6.2. Firmware modules..................................................................................................................................................9
6.3. Translator in Maxtor drives .................................................................................................................................10
7. Software restoration of Maxtor HDD .........................................................................................................................10
7.1. Diagnostics of firmware zone malfunctions ........................................................................................................10
7.2. Automatic restoration of module headers ............................................................................................................12
7.3. Translator restoration ...........................................................................................................................................12
8. Surface testing of Maxtor drives.................................................................................................................................12
8.1. Surface testing of firmware zone .........................................................................................................................12
8.2. Logical scanning ..................................................................................................................................................12
8.3. Relocation of defects............................................................................................................................................13
8.4. Drive self-testing..................................................................................................................................................13
9. Auxiliary utility files...................................................................................................................................................14
10. Description of peculiarities in Maxtor drive families ...............................................................................................15
10.1. PROXIMA drive family.....................................................................................................................................15
10.2. RIGEL drive family ...........................................................................................................................................15
10.3. NIKE drive family .............................................................................................................................................16
10.4. ATHENA DSP drive family ..............................................................................................................................17
10.5. ATHENA Poker drive family ............................................................................................................................18
10.6. ROMULUS DSP/Poker drive family.................................................................................................................18
10.7. VULCAN drive family ......................................................................................................................................19
10.8. ARES 64K drive family.....................................................................................................................................19
10.9. N40P drive family..............................................................................................................................................20
10.10. FALCON drive family .....................................................................................................................................21
10.11. CALIPSO drive family ....................................................................................................................................22
11. Data restoration.........................................................................................................................................................23
11.1. Diagnostics during data restoration....................................................................................................................23
11.2. Solution to the translator problem for data recovery .........................................................................................24

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

1. Purpose
Utilities of PC-3000 software and hardware complex can be used for service maintenance of Maxtor drives.
Basic repair capabilities:
- correction of damaged data structures in drive firmware;
- hiding physically damaged parts of drive surfaces using reserved space provided by the manufacturer;
- removal of data protection password.
We have also reviewed repair methods for electronic boards of the drives as well as causes of specific
malfunctions.
Warning! The success of utilities' usage depends on the level of operator's proficiency. Incorrect application of
algorithms implemented in the utilities may irreversibly damage a drive or prevent restoration of its data.

2. Structure of drive families

Table 1. Structure of drive families.


Family, factory alias, Capacity, Reading / writing
utility. Model Disks Maximum LBA
Gb. heads
536DX, 4W100H6 100 3 6 195,711,264
VULCAN, 4W080H6 80 3 6 160,086,528
pcmx_dsp.exe, 4W060H4 60 2 4 120,103,200
ver. 2.01 4W040H3 40 2 3 80,043,264
4W030H2 30 1 2 60,030,432
D541X, 2B020H1 20.4 1 1 40,020,624
ATHENA DSP, 2B015H1 15.4 1 1 30,214,800
pcmx_dsp.exe, 2B010H1 10.2 1 1 20,012,832
ver. 2.01
34098H4 40.9 2 4 80,043,264
Diamond Max VL40,
33073H3 30.7 2 3 60,032,448
PROXIMA,
32049H2 20.4 1 2 40,021,632
pcmx_dsp.exe,
31535H2 15.3 1 2 30,015,216
ver. 2.01
31024H1 10.2 1 1 20,010,816
D540-4D, 4D080H4 30.0 2 4 160,086,528
ROMULUS DSP, 4D060H3 41.0 2 3 120,069,936
pcmx_dsp.exe, 4D040H2 61.5 1 2 80,043,264
ver. 2.01 4D030H2 82.0 1 2 60,030,432
D531X, 2R015H1 15.0 1 1 29,297,520
NIKE, 2R010H1 10.2 1 1 20,011,824
pcmx_dsp.exe,
ver. 2.01
5T060H6 61.5 3 6 120,103,200
Diamond Max Plus 60,
5T040H4 40.9 2 4 80.043,264
RIGEL,
5T030H3 30.7 2 3 60,030,432
pcmx_dsp.exe,
5T020H2 20.4 1 2 40,021,632
ver. 2.01
5T010H1 10.2 1 1 20,010,816
D541X, 2B020H1 20.4 1 1 40,020,624
ATHENA Poker 2B015H1 15.4 1 1 30,214,800
pcmx_pkr.exe, 2B010H1 10.2 1 1 20,012,832
ver. 2.01
Fireball 3, 2F040J0/L0 40 1 1 80,293,248
ARES 64K, 2F030J0/L0 30 1 1 60,058,656
pcmx_pkr.exe, 2F020J0/L0 20 1 1 40,718,160
ver. 2.01

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

Diamond Max 16, 4R060L0/J0 60 1 2 120,103,200


FALCON, 4R080L0/J0 80 2 3 No data
pcmx_pkr.exe, 4R120L0 120 2 4 No data
ver. 2.01 4R160L0/J0 160 4 8 No data
Diamond Max Plus 8, 6E040L0 20 1 1 80,293,248
N40P, 6E030L0 30 1 1 60,058,656
pcmx_pkr.exe, 6E020L0 40 1 1 40,718,160
ver. 2.01
6Y200P0 200 3 6 398,297,088
Diamond Max Plus 9,
6Y160L0/P0 160 3 5 320,173,056
CALIPSO,
6Y120L0/P0 120 2 4 240,121,728
pcmx_pkr.exe,
6Y080L0/P0 80 2 3 160,086,528
ver. 2.01
6Y060L0 60 1 2 120,103,200
D541X and D540X-4D drive families consist of two subfamilies: “DSP” and “Poker”, characterized by
considerable differences in the functioning of factory mode commands. “DSP” and “Poker” are respective labels on a
system controller chip (please see section 9).
In families using a single disk and one head only the rated drive capacity is achieved through usage of different
number of physical cylinders.

3. Basic options for repair of Maxtor drives


The Ɋɋ-3000 package utilities for the above-listed drives provide for the following repair operations:
- drive testing in factory mode;
- restoration of the drive firmware data;
- reading of the drive's ROM copy;
- review and checking of the firmware structure;
- loading of a program for firmware data access (LDR file);
- creation of an LDR file if an operational drive is available;
- review the G-List and P-List tables of hidden defects;
- addition of discovered defects to P-List or G-List;
- translator recalculation;
- running and monitoring of a drive's self-testing routine (for DSP-based models).

4. Preparation for work


1. Connect the Ɋɋ-3000PRO tester cable to the IDE connector of the drive being tested.
2. Connect the power cable to the drive being tested.
3. Switch on the power. If a PC3K PWR power supply adapter is present, the power supply is switched on
automatically at utility start. Power may be switched on without turning the PC off first. Damage to the PC-3000 PRO
controller in that mode is unlikely; however its output cascades may be damaged in cases when a burnt-out electronic
board is connected.
Attention! You'll need to have EMM386.EXE loaded in order for the Maxtor utilities to operate. Due to some
peculiarities of himem.sys driver functioning in Windows the utilities for Maxtor DSP, POKER/ARDENT have been
designed for use of EMS services, therefore the following line must be present in the config.sys file to enable loading
of the EMS driver (device=c:\windows\emm386.exe RAM).
4. Start a utility corresponding to the connected drive's family using the shell.com command shell for convenience.
5. Auxiliary utility files are located in the same directory with the utilities. Please see details regarding auxiliary files
in section 8.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

5. Utility usage

5.1. Launching the utility

After launching the utility sends a command for reading a drive's ID area and displays a menu for drive family
selection. Drive families are identified in the menu by their factory aliases. For correspondence between family aliases
and models please see section 2.
After drive family selection you'll see a menu for utility start:
Standard mode
Re-read drive ID
Initialization from SA
LDR-file loading
Memory buffer writing
Suppress Reset while utility work
Standard mode starts the utility with complete drive initialization. If the drive is malfunctioning (LDR file is
either not loaded or its loading has not activated the drive firmware) the following error message is output:
Error loading the modules table!
If the DISK(PN=1Fh) module cannot be read the following message will appear:
Error loading configuration module!
Re-read drive ID command updates configuration data in the “MODEL” line. This feature is useful for
diagnostics during drive start.
Initialization from SA command forces partial start of a drive loading firmware from its service data area on
disk. If the drive start succeeds, firmware version should be modified, but that procedure is not automatic. Use the “Re-
read drive ID” command to update the information in the “MODEL” line.
LDR-file loading – accessing that command is recommended without drive initialization in cases, when
firmware data must be restored.
Memory buffer writing command is optional and repeats similar option from the "Work with memory buffer"
menu of the utility. It serves for a more convenient initialization of ATHENA DSP drives, which require for a proper
start loading of a RAM copy from another drive in addition to an LDR file.
Suppress Reset while utility work menu option disables the Reset signal during utility launch and operation.
Resetting is enabled by default.

5.2. Utility menu structure

Standard mode selection in the mode selection menu with subsequent drive initialization brings up the main
menu of the utility:
Logical scanning
Disc firmware zone
Disc ID
Defects table
SELF TEST
Exit

5.2.1. Logical scanning


Logical scanning is a drive surface test utilizing logical parameters. This command is described in detail in
Section 8.2.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

5.2.2. Disc firmware zone

Selection of that option brings up the following menu:


Work with memory buffer
Work with SA
LDR- file loading
LDR- file creation
Security subsystem

5.2.2.1. Work with memory buffer


Work with memory buffer option brings up the following menu:
Memory buffer reading
Memory buffer writing
Both those commands allow respectively reading and writing of memory buffer. Work with memory buffer is
necessary while starting a drive with the help of an LDR file. As a matter of fact, when a drive is started using an LDR
file several firmware variables remain uninitialized preventing recording to firmware zone. However, this method has
limited applicability and works with ATHENA DSP family drives only. We do not consider currently the applicability
of the method for other drive families because of its complexity since the procedure of loading adaptive data is just as
efficient as memory image loading remaining at the same time much simpler and easier. An opportunity for work with
memory buffer is implemented in the utilities for all drive families, so you can try to develop an alternative method
different from the one suggested by our experts.
Earlier versions of the utilities used the method of memory image loading instead of firmware initialization after
loading of an LDR file, which somewhat complicated utility application. In the current version the problem has been
resolved by the "Test firmware zone recording" command (please see section 7).

5.2.2.2. Work with SA


Work with firmware zone menu consists of the following commands:
Checking of disc FM structure
SA surface checking
Reading of modules
Writing of modules
Reading module groups
Writing module groups
SA write test
Modules repairing
Translator regeneration
Spindle stop
Checking of disc FM structure command outputs a report on the condition of firmware modules. Start of that
command forces reading of modules taking about 1 minute on the average. The command is described in detail in
section 6.
SA surface checking command allows testing surface of the firmware zone using the UBA addressing mode.
Reading of modules command allows reading of modules. While reading it records copied modules to the
“MXDSPMOD” or “MXPKRMOD” directory. The first four characters represent UBA for the sector containing
module beginning in hex format and the four characters following a colon mean module length in hexadecimal
notation. The respective column will show the position number. Please see Table 2 for relation between a position
number and the purpose of module corresponding to it.
Writing of modules – command accomplishes recording of modules from the “MXDSPMOD” or
“MXPKRMOD” directory. Checksum is not recalculated during module recording because many modules are not
protected with a checksum and some of them have a different algorithm of its calculation. The respective column will
show the position number. Please see Table 2 for relation between a position number and the purpose of module
corresponding to it.
Reading module groups and Writing module groups commands represent another variant of work with data
contained in firmware zone. It grants access to firmware data copy using another magnetic head if the drive has one.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 5
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

Files of module groups (*.smb) contain all the modules accessible for individual reading plus blank spaces. Those
commands are not used in the methods, which we have developed for restoration of hard drives; however, there is a
certain probability of malfunctions, which might require their use.
SA write test command loads adaptive data and determines correctness of recording to the firmware zone. The
command is implemented for additional drive initialization after loading of an LDR file. Usage of that command is
described in section 7.
Modules repairing command allows restoration of modules with incorrect headers. Usage of that command is
described in section 7.
Translator regeneration command accomplishes creation of translator modules from the factory defects table
(module PN=33h). That command is described in detail in para. 7.3.
Spindle stop command switches a drive to the “sleep” mode. It is used during the Hot Swap procedure.

5.2.2.3. LDR-file loading


LDR-file loading command will offer to select an LDR file and output the following loading mode menu:
Load ROM and modules
Load ROM
Load modules
Please see more detailed description of loading modes for LDR files in section 7.

5.2.2.4. LDR-file creation


Using the command with an operational drive you can create a loader file (LDR file) for the drive. The
command will function properly only if the family of the connected drive has been selected correctly during utility
launch. Otherwise creation of an LDR file will either cause an error or produce a file with incorrect data unable to load.

5.2.2.5. Security subsystem


The option brings up submenu with the following commands:
Review information command displays current condition of security subsystem and set passwords.
Clear passwords command disables data protection.

5.2.3. Disc ID
The option serves for modification of model name and its serial number. These parameters are stored in the
DISK module of the drive firmware (position number 1Fh).

5.2.4. Defects table

The Defects table command brings up the following menu:


View P-List
View G-List
Move G-List defects to P-List
Erase G-List
Erase P-List & G-List
Import from Defectoscope
View P-List command reports defects hidden to P-List.
View G-List command reports defects hidden to G-List. The “LBA(def)” column of the report contains LBA
addresses of defective sectors. The “LBA(subst)” column contains LBA addresses of sectors used for substitution of
defective sectors. The “Candidate” column contains flags of candidate defects. If the respective defect row shows “¥”
in the "Candidate" column it means that the defect hasn't been actually relocated and the "LBA(subst)" sector for such
defect will be the same as "LBA(def)". Complete G-List size is indicated in the «Capacity» line, it is different in
various drive families. For example, ATHENA DSP drives have capacity for up to 636 defects.
Move G-List defects to P-List command allows to transfer defects from G-List to P-List.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
6 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

Erase G-List command resets defects stored in G-List.


Erase P-List & G-List command clears all hidden defects in a drive and resets the information about the
number of relocated defects in the summary table of defects (module PN = 33h). If it is desirable to preserve the
information about the defects previously relocated in the drive, you should create backup copies of modules PN = 37,
18, 78, 1B, 33.
Import from Defectoscope command allows addition of defects discovered by the Defectoscope software to P-
List or G-List.

5.2.5. SELF TEST mode

The SELF TEST command brings up the following menu:


Start SelfScan
Stop SelfScan
View SelfScan state
Start SelfScan switches a drive to self-testing mode.
Stop SelfScan stops self-testing.
View SelfScan state allows monitoring of self-testing progress. Drive's self-testing is discussed in more detail
in para. 8.3.

6. Firmware

6.1. General information

Firmware of Maxtor drives is subdivided into two parts. The first part of the microcode is stored in masked
ROM inside the processor chip and in Flash ROM. The second part of a drive's firmware is recorded in the firmware
zone. In Maxtor drives it is accessible through logical sectors specifically assigned for that purpose and called “UBA”
(Util Block Addressing, somewhat similar to LBA), automatically converted by the microcode into respective physical
location on disk surface.
PCB firmware consists of two portions: masked ROM in the processor and an external parallel or serial Flash
ROM. Such a scheme has been implemented most likely because masked ROM inside the processor cannot be modified
with sufficient ease. The processor is initialized from the external ROM. If it is missing, the firmware microcode will be
started from ROM inside the processor. A situation is possible, when the microcode inside processor may belong to
another drive family. E.g. CALIPSO drives with disconnected external ROM may be identified as N40P. Maxtor drives
have a “safe mode” jumper. When it is enabled, only firmware stored on the PCB loads but the routine for starting
motors and initialization of firmware portion on disk is skipped. You can identify precisely the version of PCB
firmware. In order to do so enable the “safe mode” jumper and launch the corresponding utility. The “MODEL” line
will show ROM version after the model name.
Drive initialization for an operational condition requires complete replacement of the PCB firmware with the
firmware from the service area on disk. If for any reason the firmware cannot be launched from the service area, its
loading to the drive processor can be forced by starting an LDR file. During the procedure keep in mind that an LDR
file contains just microcode (ROM copy and overlays) but it does not contain the data necessary for drive operation
(tables of defects, adaptive data and other settings). PCB microcode and firmware on disk have different versions. That
difference helps to tell which version is currently being run by the processor. In Poker/Ardent drive families firmware
area contains two programs for drive control: a regular version and a program for factory self test.
Identification of firmware version by labels is complicated with Maxtor drives because manufacturing factories
do not observe strict version numbering rules, which fact leads to quite a lot of incompatible firmware versions with the
same identification codes. Compatibility issues may be caused also by the adaptive parameters for the reading/writing
magnetic heads stored in firmware microcode. However, despite the fact that compatibility cannot be 100% guaranteed,
firmware version can be identified using the following guidelines:
1. Abbreviated values MODEL+HDA+PCBA+UNIQUE. E.g.: 2B020H1110511.
2. Identifying letters, through a comma. E.g.: K,M,B,E.
3. The line in large print over the IDE connector label. E.g.: A4FBA.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 7
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

Modules map in Maxtor drives contains no names of modules, though some of them still do have names. Such
names are stored in the header of a respective module. Therefore it is impossible to find out the name of a module
without reading its contents. It is possible to introduce unified numbering of modules for various Maxtor drive families,
i.e. the so-called position number (hereinafter PN), that allows convenient identification of specific modules' purpose.
Purposes of the majority of active modules are described in the Table 2.
Copies of the firmware zone are provided for each magnetic head. It is also duplicated using "senior" UBA
locations that are not included into the main map. By default firmware works with all copies since the drive is capable
of operation in a mode using all copies. Reading and writing of module groups serves as a means of accessing a copy of
firmware zone.
The report output by the “Check firmware structure” command (para. 5.2.2.2) contains the following
information:
General information
The section displays selected drive family, minimum and maximum physical cylinders of user's data zone.
DISK configuration module
The module contains drive parameters: number of reading/writing heads and the map of their connections to
the pre-amplifier/commutator chip.
Zone table
Physical location of density zones in a drive.
Data modules
The table with a report on data modules consists of:
- data module number in “#” column;
- PN – position number of the module;
- UBA address of module beginning;
- module length;
- reading flag “Rd”, set to “¥” in case of successful reading or “-” if a module cannot be read;
- “ChkSum” flag set to “¥” in case of successful checksum calculation or “-” in case of calculation error;
- “Id” identification string, beginning with “*” character in case of module containing a table and a line
identifying the table, it begins with “¥” in case of correct data module identification as well as the header read
from the module; if the header contains an error the line will begin with “-” followed by the header actually read
from the module;
- comment that allows to determine the status of modules required for drive operation.
Loadable ROM
The report shows initial UBA, ROM version, identifier, reading status and checksum. Please note that reliable
identification of ROM version is possible using checksum only. It is determined by the fact that the same version
identifier in ROM corresponds to several different actual firmware versions. If checksums of ROM copies in different
drives match, it means that the drives have the same microprogram.
Overlays
The table of report on overlays consists of:
- overlay number in “#” column (a drive has no 18h module);
- UBA address of overlay beginning;
- reading flag “Rd”, set to “¥” in case of successful reading or “-” if a module cannot be read;
- “Id” identification flag set to “¥” in case of identifier match or “-” if the identifier does not match;
- “ChkSum” flag set to “¥” in case of successful checksum calculation or “-” in case of calculation error.
G-List
The section reflects information on the G-List defects table status.
Passwords
Allows reviewing of passwords set in a drive.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
8 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

6.2. Firmware modules


Table 2 contains a summary of data regarding firmware modules and their purpose. It combines position
numbers of modules, module purposes and their necessity for drive operation.
Table 2. Position numbers correspondence.
Position number Module purpose Importance
(PN), hex
1E SRV – calibration adaptive data. A
21 RCT – adaptive information of data zone on surface. A
37 U_LIST – firmware zone translator. A
78 RZTBL – zone table. A
18 AT_PDL (P-List) – translator part responsible for P-List. A
1F DISK – drive ID. B
1B AT_POL (G-List) – growing defects table. B
39 ROM copy B
38 First part of microcode overlays B
4F Second part of microcode overlays B
95 Alternative DISK used in several Poker/Ardent drives. B
1D DMCS – translator part responsible for operations’ caching. C
2F S.M.A.R.T. thresholds. D
1A SECU – security system module (ATA passwords). D
30 S.M.A.R.T. attributes. D
70 S.M.A.R.T. Summary Log. D
71 S.M.A.R.T. Self-Test Log. D
63 Copy of S.M.A.R.T. attributes D
33 HUTIL & HUSR – pivot defects table. E
72 S.M.A.R.T. Host Vendor Log E
34 RAER_H00 E
64 MAXATG E
5E EVTLG_00 E
7B FWA E
11 MX_ST_CFG1 E
43 MX_ST_CFG2 E
0D MX_ST_CFG3 E
0E MX_ST_SCRIPT E
22 Various settings (flags) E
7A U_LIST – copy of firmware zone translator E
83 Information on drive parts. E
31 DISK – second drive ID copy E
14 STRS E
35 AT_XAL E
46 OPTI – self-testing settings. E
47 STRS E
48 Information on drive parts. E
Codes of the «Importance» column in Table 2:
A – essential and must have version corresponding to the specific head-and-disk assembly;
B – yes, necessary, but can be replaced with one from another drive;
C – yes, necessary, but partial module corruption does not prevent drive from starting;
D – without one the drive starts normally but considerably slower than a totally operational drive;
E – a drive is operational without such module.
One more mechanism is implemented in the utility for work with the firmware zone, i.e. reading or recording of
groups of modules. A group of modules means modules or sectors combined according to a certain functional feature.
For example, here belong modules containing microcontroller code (overlays) or data modules (translator, adaptive data
and other tables). The said mechanism has the following differences compared to standard work with modules:
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 9
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

- it allows access to firmware zone areas that are not marked in the modules table;
- it allows access to firmware copy using another physical head (or the same head if there is only one present in
a drive).
S.M.A.R.T. attributes can be cleared by recording the module with PN=30h from a drive with «good»
S.M.A.R.T, using the “Writing of modules” command (para. 5.2.2.2.).

6.3. Translator in Maxtor drives

Translator is a program that translates physical sectors into logical ones used by an operating system. It is a
general rule for all drives that factory defects are hidden by means of their exclusion from translation. Thus, for
example, if we have a sequence of physical sectors P0,P1,P2,P3, where LBA of physical sector P0 is indicated as L0
and sector P2 is defective, then the sector coordinates will be recorded to the P_LIST in a location inside the zone
specifically devoted to the sectors P0-P3 that we have chosen. The record is made not explicitly as Cyl, Head, Sec, but
in a special notation instead. The counter of defective sectors in the RZTBL table for the zone including the selected
P0-P3 sectors will grow by 1. As a result when an operating system accesses the group of sectors beginning with LBA0
the translator will show the said group as follows:
LBA0 – P0
LBA1 – P1
LBA2 – P3, etc.
Thus we see that sector P2 is excluded from the totality of LBA sectors available to the operating system.
Now let us examine a case, when there is no record indicating that the P2 sector is hidden. It can happen in the
following cases: recording of translator tables from another drive, HotSwap operation or erasure of defects' tables. The
situation will cause sector P2 to appear among the LBA sectors visible for the operating system, but there's more to it!
LBA2 used to be indicated as P3, but now it is shifted to P2! Consequently, all numbers of subsequent sectors will be
shifted by 1. Thus at an attempt to read the sector located after the LBA2 address and containing a directory or a FAT
table the operating system will read not the actual sector containing the directory, but the preceding one containing
erroneous information.
The number of defects in an actual drive may come up to several thousands (or even tens of thousands) sectors.
Therefore actual locations of files, directories and file system tables can be shifted from the expected values by several
hundreds of sectors.
But let us get back to Maxtor. The translator program data are stored in the following modules: U_LIST
(PN=37h), AT_PDL (PN=18h) and RZTBL (PN=78h). A drive forms the translator through an intermediate table with
the PN=33h. The table contains defects in regular notation: cylinder, head, sector. There is an opportunity of compiling
translator tables from that intermediate table using the “Translator regeneration” command. The utility does not show
defects interpreting the translator directly but uses the table instead. Therefore if the translator modules get overwritten
the utility will continue to show the same list of defects as before modification of the translator modules.
Relocation of defects to the G-List table is accomplished using another method. The G-List table does not
exclude sectors from the LBA addressing space. Instead it replaces them using reserved sectors. The reserved space
begins after the highest LBA of a drive. Then the above example will be represented as follows.
L0 – P0
L1 – P1
L2 – reserved sector
L3 – P3, etc.
During the procedure no shift of LBA sectors occurs. Loss of information in the G-List table does not tell on
data restoration in any way. Of course, a situation is possible when a sector hidden by a drive to the G-List could have
contained information critical for functioning of the file system. However, such situation is unlikely and it is
recommended to clear the G-List if it contains any hidden defects, during the process of damaged firmware zone
restoration for data recovery.

7. Software restoration of Maxtor HDD

7.1. Diagnostics of firmware zone malfunctions

Incorrect information recorded to the firmware zone can lead to drive's malfunctions. It may also result from a
problem with electronics or mechanical parts. Diagnostics of such problems is complicated by the fact that

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
10 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

malfunctions of electronics and firmware zone defects can be manifested by the same drive behaviour as incorrect
information in the firmware zone modules.
Firmware zone malfunction may manifest itself as follows:
- The drive is identified correctly but it produces an error for each sector at an attempt to read from disk surface
using LBA (similar situation is possible if a password is set).
- The drive is identified by its factory alias, for example, “Maxtor ATHENA”.
- The drive starts the motor, unparks the heads but does not report on readiness (hangs).
Practically in all of the above cases (except for CALIPSO drive family, see para. 10.9.) factory mode commands
of the drive do not work. In order to switch the drive to a mode, in which factory commands can be started, you'll have
to start it using an LDR file. That can be accomplished using two methods:
1. Drive start without setting the “safe mode” jumper.
That method will work if during the utility launch the drive is identified by its factory alias and the safe mode
jumper is disabled. The essence of that method consists in loading just a part of LDR file modules. The modules at that
must be exactly identical to the original ones in the drive. Step-by-step algorithm:
1. Switch on the power and start the pcmx_dsp.exe or pcmx_pkr.exe utility.
2. In the mode menu select the “LDR-file loading” option.
3. Load an LDR file in the “Modules loader” mode. If the loading procedure succeeds the drive will allow
operations with the firmware zone.
One difference of that method compared to drive switching to safe mode is expressed in the fact that during start
the drive is able to load the defects table and adaptive parameters from the firmware zone. Drive start in safe mode does
not accomplish that. That method will not work if modules having "A" importance are corrupt (see Table 2).
2. Drive start using the “safe mode” jumper setting.
During utility launch in safe mode you'll see the drive's factory alias. The method is recommended in cases, when
the drive "hangs during start" or does not start without the safe mode jumper.
1. Set the “safe mode” jumper (see PCB schemes in section 10).
2. Switch on the power and launch pcmx_dsp.exe or pcmx_pkr.exe utility.
3. If you work with a ROMULUS DSP or Poker hard drive run the “Initialization from SA” command (see para.
5.1.).
4. In the mode menu select the “LDR-file loading” option.
5. Load an LDR file in the “Load ROM and modules”. In case of successful loading the drive will spin up its
motor and report on readiness.
6. In case of ROMULUS DSP hard drives sometimes you have to suppress the Reset signal during utility launch
(see para. 5.1.).
7. Select the “Standard mode” from the mode menu. If during mode entry you see the «Error loading modules
table!» message, it means that an unsuitable LDR file has been loaded, drive hanging has occurred while
loading RAM copy or some problem with electronics/HDA has taken place.
After drive start with the help of an LDR file in order to determine the modules condition you should start the
“Checking of disc FM structure” command (para. 5.2.2.2) and study the report contents carefully using the Table 2. If
the report contains incorrect module headers, their restoration is described in para. 7.2.
Prior to modules repair you should make sure that sectors recording to the firmware area is performed correctly.
In fact drive start using an LDR file firmware initialization is accomplished incompletely leading to errors in its
operation. In order to verify recording correctness you should run the "Test firmware zone recording" command (para.
5.2.2.2). The test consists of two parts: loading of adaptive data from module PN=1Eh and testing of the drive’s ability
to write to firmware zone by recording one sector with randomly selected contents to an unused portion of firmware
zone called “swap1”. If the recording test succeeds the following message is displayed: «Record offset: 0», which
means correctness of recording operations in the firmware zone.
Let us consider the problems which may arise during the test. If the module PN=1Eh is damaged the routine for
loading the adaptive data will abort with an error, which definitely means impossibility of correct recording to the
firmware zone. If a record offset occurs, operations over firmware are also impossible; that may be caused by drive
malfunction during the adaptive data loading stage.
Warning! Save all modules from a drive prior to recording anything to it. That requirement is determined by unstable
drive behavior during recording to its firmware zone. It means that in case of problems with adaptive data one module
can be written over another! That will lead to loss of firmware data, which will be unrecoverable, if the data hasn't been
saved!

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 11
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

7.2. Automatic restoration of module headers


One quite frequent malfunction of Maxtor drives is manifested in data corruption in the firmware zone modules.
They can become corrupt because of errors during reading/recording operations. Errors may be caused by lack of
contact between motor/commutator, magnetic head malfunction, scratches on disk surface or, most often, interruptions
in drive power supply. The symptoms in all these cases are the same indicating translator modules corruption.
Usually modules corruption is limited to an incorrect identification string, though checksum remains correct. In
order to restore such a module (for example, P-List), it would be sufficient just to record the correct header and
recalculate its checksum. The following modules may be damaged as described above: P-List (PN=18h)1, G-List
(PN=1Bh), DMCS (PN=1Dh). If they are corrupt, their identification strings are replaced with the following:
NO_PLIST, NO_GLIST, NO_DMCS. Similar corruption is possible for the module U_LIST00 (PN=37h), but it is very
rare. If this module has correct header, its automatic recovery is not recommended.
Despite the fact that practically all the modules have copies, it is impossible to restore the original modules using
their copies, since they are corrupt, too. Checksums of modules are practically always correct; though module contents
may be damaged.
For the restoration of a module with damaged header the following command sequence is used: “Firmware data”
– “Work with firmware zone” – “Restore modules” (para. 5.2.2.2). Then the name of damaged module is selected from:
DMCS, U_LIST, AT_POL (G-List), AT_PDL (P-List) with subsequent pressing [Enter]. If a module is undamaged
accidental selection of the command for its restoration will not affect its contents at all.
Warning! The “Restore modules” command just corrects module header and recalculates its checksum! Module
contents remains as it has been read from the drive being restored. If the data stored in the module is incorrect and the
drive hangs during its loading, the "Modules repairing" command will produce no effect. That command also doesn't
control recording, i.e. if a drive has recorded the module incorrectly or recorded it to another location, the restore
operation will return no errors!
Warning! The “Restore modules” command records the module being restored to the firmware zone and a recording
failure may erase important data in the firmware zone. Therefore you should save the modules and create an LDR file
prior to launching that command.

7.3. Translator restoration

The task of translator restoration appears when its tables contain incorrect data or unreadable sectors. In such
situation it is possible to create translator tables on the basis of a pivot defects table (module PN=33h) provided it is
intact.
Translator recalculation is started by the “Translator regeneration” command (para. 5.2.2.2.). The operation
may take quite a long time. Everything depends upon the number of defects in the pivot table. The resulting translator
will not contain the defects relocated in the service zone (therefore the operation is blocked when relocated defects are
present in the firmware zone). All tracks hidden using RZTBL will also be transferred to AT_PDL; theoretically it may
cause a discrepancy between the original and recalculated translator. We haven’t encountered such discrepancies in
practice.

8. Surface testing of Maxtor drives

8.1. Surface testing of firmware zone

Firmware zone condition can be evaluated using the test provided in the utility: SA surface checking (please
see para. 5.2.2.2). Testing is performed in UBA notation. Discovered defective sectors are added to a report. Only areas
containing groups of modules are tested.

8.2. Logical scanning

1 Complete list of correspondence between position numbers (PN) and modules is summarized in the Table 2.
Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
12 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

The “Logical scanning” command starts drive surface test utilizing logical parameters (para. 5.2.1).
Test parameters:
Initial LBA position: 0
Final LBA position: xxxxxxxx
Reversive scanning: No
Number of passes: 3
Perform writing test: No
Verif. instead of reading: Yes
Put defects to: P-LIST
Initial and final LBA position parameters determine the test range.
Reversive scanning defines testing direction. Switching is performed using the [Y] key for "Yes" and [N] for
"No" or [Space]. A drive reads data ahead therefore direct scanning is somewhat faster than reverse.
Number of passes parameter determines the number of complete test passes from the initial to final LBA. Input
range is from 1 to 100.
Writing can be switched on in the Perform writing test and verification procedure can be replaced with reading.
Testing quality in such case improves, but its duration increases, too. Switching writing on/off and substitution of
reading instead of verification is done using [Y] key for "Yes" and [N] for "No" or [Space]. The surface test is based on
an adaptive algorithm – detected defects are not addressed during subsequent passes. This procedure considerably
decreases test duration for drives with a large number of defects. Please keep in mind that testing duration depends
heavily on the number of defective sectors in a drive: the greater their number is the longer the test will run!
Put defects to P-LIST or G-LIST. Switching is accomplished using the [Space] key.
Upon completion of the surface scanning procedure, the table of all discovered logical defects in LBA notation
appears on the screen. Pressing [Enter] key converts all logical defects into physical ones and displays them on the
screen; second pressing [Enter] appends all the defects to previous records in the defects table.

8.3. Relocation of defects

The utility allows hiding defects to the P-List factory defects table as well as to user's G-List table.
P-List defects table can be reviewed using the “View P-List” command (para. 5.2.4). Defects are output from the
pivot defects table (PN=33h) and not restored from the respective translation tables. . It means that if the translation
tables are overwritten with tables from another drive or modified otherwise, the "View P-List" command will still
display the same list of defects as it used to prior to recording and the list will not correspond to the defects actually
relocated in the drive. The same inconsistency is observed when module PN=33h is recorded by copying from another
drive. However, if the utility tools are used for operations with the defects’ tables the pivot table of defects will be
modified correctly.
Some Maxtor drives have relocated defects within the firmware zone. In that case resetting the tables of defects
will be disabled because the utility does not provide for firmware zone recording taking into account the relocated
defects.
G-List defects table can be reviewed using the “View G-List” command (para. 5.2.4).
Defects search is accomplished using the “Logical scanning” command of the utility or with the help of
Defectoscope software (“Import from Defectoscope” command). Discovered defects can be transferred either to P-List
or G-List at user's discretion.
Maxtor drives allow hiding of whole tracks as well as track parts, i.e. several successive sectors added together
as one defect record saving the table space. Grouping of successive defects is performed by the drive automatically.
Maxtor drives automatically relocate defective sectors to G-List, and the “Defects table” - “Move G-List to P-
List” command sequence transfers those defective sectors to P-List, the procedure simultaneously clears G-List. The
operation is performed by the drive itself, the utility just issues the command, therefore if the transfer of defects ends in
an error, it means that the defects stored in G-List cannot be added to P-List.

8.4. Drive self-testing

This version of the utility allows running factory self-testing routine in Maxtor DSP drives; the feature is not
implemented for Poker and Ardent drive families yet. Upon self-testing a drive recalculates its adaptive parameters,
hides defective sectors and resets S.M.A.R.T. attributes to factory defaults.
A drive is switched to self-testing mode by the Start SelfScan command (para. 5.2.5), whereupon, during
subsequent power-on a 30 sec. pause will be made before the drive starts self-testing (drive LED will indicate the
running procedure by blinking at 2Hz frequency). If during those 30 seconds you issue a reset or drive ID reading
command, the drive will enter its operational mode until next power-off/on.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 13
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

Drive LED will be blinking with varied frequency while performing the tests.
The utility can display progress of the self-testing procedure. To accomplish that you should issue the View
SelfScan state command (para. 5.2.5) for an already connected drive with on-going testing procedure. The window will
show current status: test number, cylinder, etc. Please note, that a connected drive does not respond to utility commands
during on-going self-testing process, utility launch in that case may cause self-testing failure.
As a summary we can suggest two methods for indication of self-testing progress with monitoring of a drive
connected or not connected to a PC and powered by an independent supply.
1. Procedure of drive start with status monitoring.
- SELF TEST - Start SelfScan
- Without leaving the utility and with IDE cable connected to the drive, switch its power off and on.
- Start View SelfScan state, then the self-testing progress report will be displayed on-screen.
2. Procedure of self-testing using an independent power supply without a connection to PC.
- SELF TEST - Start SelfScan
- Disconnect the drive and connect it to an independent power supply unit.
- Since PCBs in Maxtor drives have no LEDs you can connect an external LED as shown in figure 1.

IDE Pin 39 390 Ohm


+ 5V

Fig. 1. Connection of external LED for monitoring the drive self-testing process.
We have observed different probability of successful self-testing completion with a prior resetting of the defects’
tables and without it. Therefore we advise to clear the tables of defects before running the test.
Successful completion of self-testing will be indicated by the drive LED blinking regularly at 1 Hz, failure and
emergency exit from the testing procedure are indicated by much faster blinking – at approximately 10 Hz. Drive
hanging during self-testing is manifested by absence of changes in its condition for a long (for example, half an hour)
time and lack of LED indication. The LED in such case may be on or off, but it won't blink.
Warning! In some cases when self-testing terminates with a fatal error, firmware zone is considerably damaged
(modules essential for drive operation are missing), therefore you must always backup the firmware zone before
beginning self-testing procedure.
Warning! Self-testing will not start correctly if a drive is started using an LDR file.
Warning! All user data will be destroyed during the self-testing procedure.

9. Auxiliary utility files


The main pcmx_dsp.exe ɢ pcmx_pkr.exe utility files of the complex are supplemented by auxiliary service
files. The names of those files coincide with utility name while their extension corresponds to the file type:
/utility’s name/.log – text file for the drive test results generated by the utility at the first program launch and
appended with every subsequent drive test. The file contains all the settings and test results. Data on the automatic drive
test performance is also written to this file;
/firmware version/.ldr – firmware update file.
/firmware version/.ram – file containing a copy of drive RAM.
Other file names are selected by user, but their extensions are determined by the utility depending on their
types:
*.rpm – technological files of resident firmware modules in a drive. During the reading procedure they are
copied to the directory “MXDSPMOD” or “MXPKRMOD, where first four characters represent UBA sector of module
beginning in hex notation, while four following characters mean module length in sectors in hex notation.
*.smb – technological files of groups of resident firmware modules in a drive. During the reading procedure
they are copied to the directory “MXDSPMOD” or “MXPKRMOD”, where first four characters represent UBA sector
of module beginning in hex notation, while four following characters mean module length in sectors in hex notation.
*.log files can be viewed as regular text files, *.rpm files can be viewed as binaries using a hex editor.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
14 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

10. Description of peculiarities in Maxtor drive families


Drive families are represented by their factory aliases. Though an alias is not printed (usually on HDA label) it
can be checked quite easily by means of setting the safe mode jumper. If the jumper has been set correctly the drive will
not spin up its disks and it will be identified as “Maxtor <alias>”, for example, “Maxtor N40P”. The string is formed by
a ROM microprogram and output either in safe mode, or when an error occurs during firmware zone initialization. In
some drive families aliases are marked on PCBs using serigraphy.
Safe Mode jumper location is shown in figures representing external view of drive electronics boards.

10.1. PROXIMA drive family

MAXTOR
2 LUCENT 1181K 3

LUCENT 1
MS353B3
1 1
2 1
1
1

1. RDS035L03 3. 20 MHz
2. 78L08A 4. M29F102
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 2. External view of controller board in MAXTOR PROXIMA drive family.

10.2. RIGEL drive family

The format of G-List table in that drive family is different from the usual. Therefore the information about
defects displayed by the “View G-List” command will be not quite correct. However, defects will be appended to G-
List correctly. Automatic restoration of the G-list module will also work correctly.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 15
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

2
DSP
2
D741667APGF

AGERE 1
MS453 1
1 1
1
1

1. RDS035L03
2. 20 MHz
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 3. External view of controller board in MAXTOR RIGEL drive family

10.3. NIKE drive family

1
3 1 SH6770C
1
1
1 1

HY57V161610D
2

DSP
D741864CPGF

LUCENT
2

1. B3185
2. 78L08A
3. M29F102BB
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 4. External view of controller board in MAXTOR NIKE drive family

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
16 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

10.4. ATHENA DSP drive family

One quite frequent peculiarity of drives belonging to the family is demonstrated by their behaviour in case of P-
List malfunctions, when after motor spin-up and removing the heads from parking area a drive turns the spindle motor
off but "forgets" to park the heads. The problem can be identified by a typical sound heard when the motor is turned
off. Such drives should be restored using the method of loading an LDR file in safe mode (see para. 7.1). Then you
should perform diagnostics of problems in the firmware zone, save firmware modules and restore the drive translator
(para. 11.2).

1
3 1 SH6770C
1
1
1 1

48LC1M16A1
2

DSP
D741667APGF

AGERE
2 MS453

1. B3185 3. M29F102BB
2. 78L08A
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 5. External view of control board in MAXTOR ATHENA ATA2-PLUS drive family.
Appendix 1 hereto contains a circuit diagram for connection of motor control chip in PCBs of ATHENA DSP
drives.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 17
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

10.5. ATHENA Poker drive family

1
1 SH6770C
1
1
1 1

HY57V
161610DTC-6
1
2

POKER C6
040108200
4370J2
0224S
4849943

1. B3185
2. 78L08A
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 6 External view of controller board in MAXTOR ATHENA Poker-based drive family.
10.6. ROMULUS DSP/Poker drive family
Malfunction of one of the heads in drives belonging to that family causes knocking sounds while loading an
LDR file or during calibration at utility launch.

2
DSP
3
D741667DPGF

AGERE 1
MS453 1
1 2 1
1
1

1. RDS035L03 3. 20 MHz
2. A172E
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 7. External view of controller board in MAXTOR ROMULUS drive family.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
18 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

10.7. VULCAN drive family

040405000
2 D741667CPGF 4
CC-15AE72W

AGERE 1
MS453 1
2 1
3
1
1

1. PHN210T
2. PHN207 5. M29F102BB
3. A171B
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 8. External view of controller board in MAXTOR VULCAN drive family.

10.8. ARES 64K drive family

"L" letter in model name indicates that a fluid dynamic bearing was used, for example, 2F040L0. "J" letter
means that a ball bearing was used, for example, 2F040J0.
With that drive family Maxtor designers began to use two firmware zones with similar structure but totally
different purposes. The main firmware zone is used during normal drive operation. It contains all the modules with
correct data required for drive operation.
Table of correspondence between starting modes and firmware versions in ARES 64K drives.
User mode of operation ROM loader mode Self Test mode
VAM51JJ0 VAM52JaZ VBM51J80

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 19
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

1
3 1 SH6770C
1
1
1 1

HY57V161610D
2

Poker
040111600

LUCENT
2

1. B3185 3. M29F102BB
2. 78L08A
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 9. External view of controller board in MAXTOR ARES 64K drive family.

10.9. N40P drive family

In this drive family ST25P10V6 external Flash ROM with serial access is used.
Quite numerous existing ROM versions complicate the issue of their compatibility making it difficult to pick a
matching board. ROM chip can be soldered to a new board since it does not have too many pins so the procedure can
be performed fairly quickly. Such variety of versions results from the fact that program microcode, namely, overlay 6
and ROM chip on PCB contain built-in adaptive parameters for the reading/writing heads. When modified heads are
installed during the manufacturing process, the whole firmware version has to be changed. That produces numerous
versions and as a result the microcode in the masked ROM of the drive processor ceases to match those versions.
Consequently it has to be supplemented with external ROM containing the necessary modifications to the adaptive data
and firmware version. That situation also influences drive starting with the help of an LDR file. The utility may start a
drive using another firmware version, but the adaptive data of that version may not match the drive. Usually it is
practically impossible to read the firmware if the adaptive data built-in into the microcode does not match the drive,
although running a loader file with suitable adaptive data makes everything work fine. Compatibility of adaptive data
can be controlled using the ROM version on PCB output by the drive in “safe mode”.
This family is characterized by peculiar P-List corruption. Besides the header one or several sectors of P-List
become BAD. After header restoration and recalculation of checksum the drive is still unable to start and, moreover, it
is impossible to make it record anything else to its firmware zone.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
20 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

1 3
2
2125G
W981616BH-6

Ardent C5-C1
040110100
ARDENT-C5C1
-790UK
023S
4963143

1. ST25P10V6
2. SH6782B
3. FDS9431A
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 10. External view of controller board in MAXTOR N40P drive family.

10.10. FALCON drive family

LUCENT
MS353B3

2 2

3
MAXTOR
LUCENT 1181K

1. 2DPFS20V 3. M29F102BB
2. FDS9431A 4. 20 MHz
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 11. External view of controller board in MAXTOR FALCON drive family.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 21
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

10.11. CALIPSO drive family

Just like in N40P drive family here external Flash ROM with serial access is used.
For this family a specific malfunction is typical, when one of magnetic heads goes out of order. As a result such
drive is identified as Maxtor CALIPSO, but allows reading/writing of firmware zone without an LDR file and all the
modules remain intact. The said effect is caused by the fact that during start the drive does not find one of the heads
included into its table. Therefore the firmware zone mapped for a different number of heads cannot be correctly
processed by the drive control microcode. Such drives produce slight knocking sound if a calibration command is
issued!
The following problem is possible with drives from that family: incorrect recording during an attempt to restore
a module will erase some modules having A or B importance. Consequently the drive’s firmware during the next start
will be unable to load the essential modules from the main firmware zone and it will have to switch to the alternative
zone. Therefore the modules prove to be intact after restart, but those are in fact absolutely different modules. That
condition cannot be repaired using the current version of the utility.
The “safe mode” jumper position is yet unknown for the Serial ATA modification of CALIPSO drive family.
That family uses two formats of the G-List table of defects. The utility cannot recognize table format
automatically and thus it is set up for the newest format. The older format will be displayed incorrectly. In order to view
G-List in the older format you should enter the utility having selected, for example, N40P.

LUCENT
MS353B3

2 2

MAXTOR
LUCENT 1181K

4 3

1. 2DPFS20V 3. 25P10V6
2. RDS035L03 4. 20 MHz
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Fig. 12. External view of controller board in MAXTOR CALIPSO drive family.

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
22 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ "MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60,
¤ ACELab D541X, Fireball 3, Diamond Max Plus 8, Diamond Max Plus 16, Diamond Max Plus 9"

11. Data restoration

11.1. Diagnostics during data restoration


The task of data recovery from a Maxtor drive requires, first of all, precise diagnostics of malfunction, preferably
without HDA disassembly; with simultaneous minimizing of further damage to the drive or data loss. Malfunctions,
just like methods of diagnostics can be subdivided as follows:
- PCB malfunction.
- Motor/bearing failure.
- Parking element failure.
- Reading/writing heads failure.
- Heads failure and surface scratch.
- BAD sectors.
- Complete or partial loss of firmware data.
When the scope of problems is identified it is time to begin diagnostics. What of the above has happened? In the
first turn keep in mind that damage to the firmware zone in Maxtor drives is usually not independent. It frequently
results from constant (appearance of numerous BAD sectors) or short-term malfunctions of the mechanical (bearing,
etc.) or electronic components (pre-amplifier, heads, motor control circuit, etc.).
Step 1. Let us begin with the electronics board. In order to make sure that the board is operational it is
sufficient to connect it to another drive with the same firmware version and check, whether the drive works flawlessly
with the board. That method is not complicated for Maxtor drives since the board contains no adaptive data and its start
in another drive requires just firmware version match. Please see section 6 for details on firmware version.
Step 2. If the problem is not caused by electronics then motor diagnostics should be performed. If the motor
does not spin up though the board is operational the cause is either damaged motor winding or heads sticking to disk
surface. However, in Maxtor drives the situation of motor malfunction caused by stuck heads does not occur probably
due to quite powerful motor or insignificant heads sticking. One more cause preventing rotation is seizure of a fluid
dynamic bearing. Seizure practically does not occur in drives using ball bearings in spindle, but another problem
appears, namely motor operation with obviously high noise level. That is caused by considerably greater disk beating.
One more motor problem may be related to bad contact or cable break in the connector between the electronics board
and HDA. As a result motor problems can be identified by the following signs:
- Winding closure or break.
- Seizure of fluid dynamic bearing (FDB).
- Motor operation with considerable noise level.
- Problem with connection between the motor and electronics board.
- Problems with voice coil glue quality.
Step 3. If a drive with operational electronics having no obvious problems in motor functioning does not knock
heads or produce slight knocking at attempted calibration we should proceed to the following step. Now we should start
diagnostics of surface scratch. It is difficult to perform the diagnostics completely without drive disassembly, but
through the STW lifter opening one can see up to 90% of the surface from the PCB side. In drive families containing
just one head the opening shows the work surface. A scratch having appeared on one of the surfaces will very quickly
spread to all the rest. If a significant scratch is present, it would be sufficient to identify it without disassembling the
HDA.
Step 4. If the diagnostics procedure proves operable condition of the motor, control board, absence of scratches, and
the drive unparks its heads without knocking, the cause of malfunction is either in heads damage or their incorrect
functioning (and inability to read firmware zone as a result), or in the presence of BAD sectors or in corrupt firmware
data. That is the hardest issue for identification because several malfunctions have the same signs.
Let us set the safe mode jumper. The jumper position is shown in section 10 for each drive family. Then you should
load from the menu shown at utility launch any LDR file corresponding to the family of the connected drive.
Appearance of knocking sound at loader roll-in will indicate heads malfunction. If the loader roll into memory is not
followed by knocking, but an error reading modules table occurs at entering the standard mode, it means that the loader
version does not match the ROM contents and you should select such an LDR file, which would allow reading the
modules table.
Step 5. If the table of modules can be read you may proceed with firmware diagnostics as described in para. 7.1.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 23
"MAXTOR: D536DX, D541X, Diamond Max VL40, D540-4D, D531X, Diamond Max Plus 60, Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

11.2. Solution to the translator problem for data recovery

In very rare cases a drive may not start or it may hang at power-up when its G-List contains incorrect information
under a correct header and valid checksum. You can view the G-List with an LDR file loaded. An attempt to reset (the
record to the firmware zone should be correct) G-List in that mode will not achieve a proper result as the replacement
LBA will be defined as –1. Recording a clear G-List copied from another drive of that family with the same capacity
represents a more accurate method.
There is a rather frequent situation when translator modules have correct headers and checksums and all other
essential modules are in order, but the drive still does not function using its logical parameters. At present two reasons
for such condition are known:
The first and quite rare cause occurs in CALIPSO drives when one of drive heads gets physically disconnected – the
drive translator refuses to load. That happens because the RZTBL (PN=78h) module contains the number of heads.
Diagnostics of that malfunction is described in more detail in para. 10.11.
The second variant of that situation is encountered practically in all Maxtor drives supported by the PC-3000
complex. It results from occasional recording of random or pseudo-random data to the translator table fields (data from
one module can be recorded to another). Module headers and checksums at that may remain correct. Automatic
restoration of modules in such a situation will not help restore the drive.
In order to perform diagnostics in that situation you should record to the malfunctioning drive translator modules
(PN=37h, PN=18h and PN=78h) copied from an operational drive with the same capacity. Prior to the operation save
all modules from firmware zone, especially module 33 and ensure that the firmware zone has no relocated defects. The
suggested method of diagnostics is not applicable if the firmware zone contains hidden defects. If after recording of the
translator modules the drive starts normally and can be accessed using its logical parameters, it means that the problem
resulted exactly from invalid data in the modules.
If the module PN=33 is intact (the utility will output a list of defects upon P-List query) you can perform the
“Translator recalculation” procedure (see para. 5.2.2.2 and para. 7.3).

Technical support: eng_support @acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
24 www.acelab.ru
A

CT
u503A u503B

8 MOTA
7 1 6
5 3

2
CT
4
A
MOTB
u504A u504B B

8 C
7 1 6
5 3
SPINDLE MOTOR
2
4

MOTC
u505A u505B
8 SPSNS
7 1 6
5 3
R517

R518
2
4 R519
5V
R520

Q501

2
1 25 C6
$PIN0 $PIN24 3.3V
2 $PIN1 $PIN25 26
3 $PIN2 $PIN26 27 u302 (48) IRFD110 3.3V
4 $PIN3 $PIN27 28 1 (BSP 100)
5 $PIN4 $PIN28 29
6 30 R3
$PIN5 $PIN29 U302(25)

3
7 31
A 8
$PIN6
$PIN7
$PIN30
$PIN31 32 8 7 6 5 A
9 $PIN8 $PIN32 33 33mkFx 16V C506
10 34 R2 +
$PIN9 $PIN33 R503 C01
11 $PIN10 $PIN34 35
R515 12 36 2 4
$PIN11 $PIN35
DSP (57)
DSP (148)

13 $PIN12 $PIN36 37
14 38 C5 C3
$PIN13 $PIN37 1 3
15 $PIN14 $PIN38 39
C512 16 40 7 8
$PIN15 $PIN39
17 $PIN16 $PIN40 41
R305 18 42 REGULATOR 3.3V IRF7101
$PIN17 $PIN41 u506A
19 $PIN18 $PIN42 43
20 $PIN19 $PIN43 44 2 (W241)
21 $PIN20 $PIN44 45
22 46 C2
$PIN21 $PIN45 1
23 $PIN22 $PIN46 47 12V
24 48 C1
$PIN23 $PIN47 C102 + 15 mkFx 25V
U500
DSP (119)
DSP (123)

DSP (121)

u501A 7 8 7 8
DSP (98) u502A

DSP (103)
2 2
R513

1 1
J4 RADIX
1 2 34 5 5 6 5 6
u501B u502B

8V
vr200 4 4
VCM- VCM+
3 3
12V 8 IN OUT 1 J2(9)
2 C10
C203 COM R207 WDN L1
3 COM
6 COM
7 COM

78L08A 1 2
J2
Title
REGULATOR 8V MAXTOR ATHENA ATA2-PLUS motors controller

VOICE COIL MOTOR Size Document Number Rev


PREAMPLIFIER CIRCUIT A3 ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 1

Date: Wednesday, July 30, 2003 Sheet 1 of 1

A
A
R
ROM
R512 KT C C FCOMM 8 7 6 5
1Om Voice Coil 25P10V6
KT
R511
1Om
Motor C209 R
Ardent (4) Ardent (8) 1 S Vcc 8
+3.3V
1Om 1Om 1Om 1Om C401
Ardent (212)
R510 2 7
VCM- Ardent (128) Q HOLD
1Om U401
R508 R504 VCMI 3 6
VCM+ +3.3V W C Ardent (130)
1Om
C210 R
R06 4 5 1 2 3 4
GND D Ardent (138)
1Om
U401

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33
SPINDLE MOTOR +1.7V

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41

40

39

38

37

36

35

34

33
49 32 c

Ardent (206)
49 32

Ardent (87)

Ardent (67)

Ardent (29)

Ardent (26)
Ardent (7)
R

Ardent (155)

Ardent (144)
Ardent (137)

Ardent (145)

Ardent (171)

Ardent (174)
50 50 31 31
R
51 30 C
C508 51 30 +12V
52 52 29 29
C
BUX 53 28 C C C C C C C C C C C C
53 28
54
SMOOTH 27
MOT MOT MOT CT +12V 54 L7250E 1.0 27
8 7 6 5
C B A +12V 55 55 26 26
R
56 56 25 25
R C
57 24 C S500 Q400 IR230M
57 24
58 58 23 23
+1.7V
59 22 C505
59 22
Shock Sensor
R229 R230 R231 60 21
60 21 Ardent (5)
1 2 3 4 5,6,7,8
61 61 20 20
A C Q400 A
62 62 19 19
Ardent (170) 4
63 18 R 2k
63 18 Ardent (211)
Control Line C
2 1,2,3
64 64 17 17
+3.3V

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
1

9
C501 C507
C

10

11

12

13

14

15

16
8 7 6 5 Q501
1

9
REGULATOR +1.7V C

+5V
1 2 3
Q500 1
C R
+12V 3 2 +5V
C506 Q501
1 2 3 4 R513 R
1Om 1Om R516 REGULATOR +3.3V
C
+3.3V
C511
Q500 +3.3V

Ardent (114)

Ardent (184)

Ardent (157)
Control Line

Ardent (150)

Ardent (102)
Ardent (166)

Ardent (190)

Ardent (203)

Ardent (126)
Ardent (154)
Ardent (12)

Ardent (58)

Ardent (44)

Ardent (89)

Ardent (71)

Ardent (27)

Ardent (79)
5 4 C519

R 1K

6 3
+5V C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
C513 C
7 2
R 8.2k

L500

8 1 -5VPlug to HDA Title


J1 (41)
C514 R519 C
(Preamplefier) Maxtor Diamond Max Plus 9 CALYPSO
200 Port for Diagnostic -5V Size Document Number Rev
Converter DC-DC -5V B ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 1

Date: Friday, January 23, 2004 Sheet 1 of 1


A
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

IBM

22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

Contents
1. Structure of drive families.............................................................................................................................................2
2. Utility command menu..................................................................................................................................................2
2.1. Launching the utility ..............................................................................................................................................2
2.2. Utility usage ...........................................................................................................................................................3
2.2.1. Servo test, surface scanning ............................................................................................................................3
2.2.2. Firmware data .................................................................................................................................................3
2.2.2.1. Work with memory ..................................................................................................................................4
2.2.2.2. Work with firmware zone ........................................................................................................................4
2.2.2.3. “Modify configuration” command ...........................................................................................................7
2.2.2.4. “Run an LDR file” command...................................................................................................................8
2.2.2.5. Translator recalculation............................................................................................................................8
2.2.2.6. Spindle stop..............................................................................................................................................8
2.2.2.7. Enable write cache ...................................................................................................................................8
2.2.3. Drive ID ..........................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.4. Formatting.......................................................................................................................................................9
2.2.5. Logical scanning .............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.6. S.M.A.R.T. table .............................................................................................................................................9
2.2.7. Defects table..................................................................................................................................................10
2.2.8. Automatic mode............................................................................................................................................10
2.2.9. SELFSCAN...................................................................................................................................................10
3. Drive firmware............................................................................................................................................................12
3.1. Structure of IBM HDD firmware.........................................................................................................................12
3.2. Compatibility of electronics printed circuit boards..............................................................................................13
3.3. Description of structure and methods of firmware zone access in case of malfunctions.....................................13
3.4. Critical modules for drive data.............................................................................................................................16
4. Description of IBM drive families ..............................................................................................................................17
4.1. Construction peculiarities of 22GXP(DJNA7), 34GXP(DPTA7), and 37GP(DPTA5) drive families ...............17
4.2. Construction peculiarities of 40GV(DTLA5), 75GXP(DTLA7), 60GXP(AVER), and 120GXP(AVVA) drive
families........................................................................................................................................................................18
4.3. Software repair.....................................................................................................................................................20
4.3.1. Identification and relocation of defects in user's area ...................................................................................20
4.3.2. Malfunctions of “Open modules' table cannot be read!” type ......................................................................20
4.4. Peculiarities of software restoration.....................................................................................................................21
5. Auxiliary utility files for IBM drives ..........................................................................................................................21
6. Malfunctions of electronics boards in IBM drives......................................................................................................22
7. Electric circuit diagram...............................................................................................................................................22
7.1. Elements layout....................................................................................................................................................22
7.2. Electric circuit......................................................................................................................................................23

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

1. Structure of drive families


Table 1.
Family, Model Capacity, Disks Heads Physical Sect. / Maximum
Utility. Gb cylinders track LBA
DJNA-372200 22.60 5 10 15400 351-214 44,150,400
22GXP1,
DJNA-371800 18.04 4 8 15400 351-214 35,239,680
pcibmdjn.exe,
DJNA-371350 13.57 3 6 15400 351-214 26,520,480
ver. 1.15
DJNA-370910 9.11 2 4 15400 351-214 17,803,440
1 DPTA-373420 34.21 5 10 17493 450-270 66,835,440
34GXP , DPTA-372730 27.37 4 8 17493 450-270 53,464,320
pcibmdpt.exe, DPTA-372050 20.52 3 6 17493 450-270 40,088,160
ver. 1.15 DPTA-371360 13.67 2 4 17493 450-270 26,712,000
DPTA-353750 37.50 5 10 17687 522-280 73,261,440
37GP,
DPTA-353000 30.00 4 8 17687 522-280 58,600,080
pcibmdpt.exe,
DPTA-352250 22.52 3 6 17687 522-280 43,985,088
ver. 1.15
DPTA-351500 15.02 2 4 17687 522-280 29,336,832
DTLA-305040 41.17 2 4 34326 792-370 80,418,240
40GV,
DTLA-305030 30.73 2 3 34326 792-370 60,036,480
pcibmdtl.exe,
DTLA-305020 20.57 1 2 34326 792-370 40,188,960
ver. 1.15
DTLA-305010 10.27 1 1 34326 792-370 20,074,320
DTLA-307075 76.86 5 10 27724 702-351 150,136,560
1 DTLA-307060 61.49 4 8 27724 702-351 120,103,200
75GXP , DTLA-307045 46.11 3 6 27724 702-351 90,069,840
pcibmdtl.exe, DTLA-307030 30.73 2 4 27724 702-351 60,036,480
ver. 1.15 DTLA-307020 20.57 2 3 27724 702-351 40,188,960
DTLA-307015 15.36 1 2 27724 702-351 30,003,120
IC35L060AVER07 61.49 3 6 33946 780-373 120,103,200
1
60GXP , IC35L040AVER07 41.17 2 4 33946 780-373 80,418,240
pcibmavr.exe, IC35L030AVER07 30.73 2 3 33946 780-373 60,036,480
ver. 1.15 IC35L020AVER07 20.57 1 2 33946 780-373 40,188,960
IC35L010AVER07 10.27 1 1 33946 780-373 20,074,320
IC35L120AVVA07 123.52 3 6 55443 928-448 241,254,720
1 IC35L100AVVA07 102.93 3 5 55443 928-448 201,045,600
120GXP , IC35L080AVVA07 82.34 2 4 55443 928-448 160,836,480
pcibmava.exe, IC35L060AVVA07 61.49 2 3 55443 928-448 120,103,200
ver. 1.15 IC35L040AVVA07 41.17 1 2 55443 928-448 80,418,240
IC35L020AVVA07 20.57 1 1 55443 928-448 40,188,960

2. Utility command menu

2.1. Launching the utility

At the start the utility offers the choice between two available initialization modes: “Standard” and “By
Default”. When started in the standard mode the utility reads certain parameters from the drive and initializes its
internal structures accordingly. A launch in the default mode forces the utility to act as though the drive does not
respond to its queries; however, the utility skips the delay allocated for awaiting response. Actually it does not access
the drive in that mode. That may be useful in cases of damaged drive’s firmware, when a drive does not respond to
access attempts or fails beginning to knock.
Let us review the “Standard” mode of utility launch in detail (the “By Default” launch respectively will be
accompanied by all the error messages mentioned below and pertaining to collection of information about the drive).

1 ‘X’ in family names denotes 7200 rpm drives.


Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

The utility reads drive ID during launch in order to determine its logical parameters. If a drive returns an error
the following message will be output:
Unidentified logical drive parameters
Default values used – “Final LBA” = 1000
At that the information about model name returned in the drive ID will appear in the “MODEL:” top line of the utility
window.
Then you'll be prompted to select a model in order to define the number of physically present heads for further work.
After that the utility will be adjusted to the connected drive during the following sequence:
1. reading of NV-RAM to identify some internal drive parameters. In case of an error the following message
appears: “Error reading NV-RAM. Using default parameters”.
2. reading of modules table (“USAG”). In case of an error the following message appears: “Modules table
cannot be read.Do continue?”
3. reading of the so-called "open modules table" (a synthetic table returned by a drive in case of its correct
initialization). In case of an error the following message appears: “Open modules table cannot be read”.
4. reading of zone allocation module (“ZONE”). In case of an error the following message appears: “Error
reading zone allocation module. Default zone allocation used”. If a module has been read successfully, the number of
drive heads will be adjusted accordingly. If the user's choice (selected model) does not match the estimated number the
smallest figure is assumed and the following message appears: “Model adjusted according to the number of physically
present heads. Press [Enter]”.
Please see further possible causes of malfunctions resulting in the above error messages as well as methods of their
elimination.

2.2. Utility usage


After launching the program will bring up the main operating modes menu:
Servo test
Surface scanning
Firmware data
Drive ID
Formatting
Logical scanning
S.M.A.R.T. table
Defects table
Automatic mode
SELFSCAN
Exit

2.2.1. Servo test, surface scanning

Servo test and Surface scanning, unlike utilities for other drive families do not accomplish hiding and relocation of
defects since this version of utilities has no automatic algorithm for hiding corrupted areas. Presence of those menu
items in the utility is determined by the task of telling heads that have problems from those that have none. Thus it is
not recommended to use those commands if a drive has just insignificant damage. After servo test the drive will be
unable to read from the surface in LBA mode, therefore subsequent factory formatting is required.

2.2.2. Firmware data

Firmware data. Selection of that item brings up the following menu:


Work with memory
Work with firmware zone
Modify configuration
Run an LDR file
Translator recalculation

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

Spindle stop
Enable write cache1

2.2.2.1. Work with memory


Work with memory option brings up the following submenu:
Work with ROM
Read RAM into a file
Work with NV-RAM
Work with ROM command allows reviewing data in ROM header and reading ROM into a file.
ROM report contains the following parameters:
- firmware version number (for example, A45A). It is necessary for HDD operation that the first 2 characters
of firmware version number match the corresponding two characters of P - Code recorded in NV-RAM. If there is no
match the drive will be unable to initialize using NV-RAM and spin up its spindle.
- firmware version code (Ex.: E75D9E90). It is necessary for HDD operation that the codes of firmware
version recorded in ROM and NV-RAM were the same. Otherwise the drive will be unable to initialize using NV-RAM
and spin up its spindle.
Read RAM into a file command allows reading the whole RAM space of the microcontroller or a part thereof
into a file. The maximum file size is 256 Mb. Of course, drive RAM size is much smaller but it is distributed among
different frames, thus the utility is designed with a capability of operating with the whole address space of drive
microprocessor to ensure that all required blocks can be read.
Work with NV-RAM command allows reviewing of a report on NV-RAM, reading or writing of NV-RAM to a
file.
The report on NV-RAM contains the following parameters:
- Identifier. It has to be “E2PR” for HDD operation.
- P - Code (Ex. ER4OA45A). First 4 characters (ER4O) represent family descriptor (please see Table 2.
“Family codes”). 4 last characters (A45A) represent firmware version number. It is connected with the firmware
version number recorded in ROM, namely: the first 2 characters (A4) must be the same, while 2 last characters (5A)
may differ (please see Chapter 3.1 “Structure of IBM HDD firmware”). Besides, correct drive initialization requires
that P - Code values recorded in NV-RAM and USAG match, too. Otherwise the drive will be initialized with the
default values in accordance with NV-RAM; it will spin up the spindle, but will not read firmware from disks' surface.
- Code of microprogram version (for example, E75D9E90). It is necessary for HDD operation that the codes
of firmware version recorded in NV-RAM and USAG were the same. Otherwise the drive will be initialized with the
default values in accordance with NV-RAM; it will spin up the spindle, but will not read firmware from disks' surface.
- Heads map (for example, 0 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2). The field reflects mapped correspondence between electrical
head connections and numbers of physical heads.
Table 2. Family codes.
Code Drive family
J5 DJNA 5400
J7 DJNA 7200
TW DTLA 5400
TX DTLA 7200
ER IC35AVER
VA IC35AVVA

2.2.2.2. Work with firmware zone


Work with firmware zone command brings up the following submenu:
Check firmware structure
Write/read firmware
Ignore reading error
Read modules
Write modules
Load USAG
Re-read module tables

1 This menu item is available only in utilities for DTLA, AVER, and AVVA drive models.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

Cleaning of logs (ELG1, EVLG)


Clear FLYH
Restore firmware zone
Create an LDR-file
Security subsystem
Check firmware structure is a mode that provides a report on firmware modules' integrity and their contents.
Besides, it indicates the status of "spaces" between modules located in the main and additional firmware tracks. Names
of the "spaces" are formed as follows:
“~##xx” - “spaces” in the main firmware track, where xx stands for the number of a “space”;
“~@@xx” - “spaces” in the additional firmware track, where xx stands for the number of a “space”. Please
refer to Section 3 for details on firmware structure.
The information about modules is displayed in tables and individual report blocks containing the “RD:” and “ID”
fields. The “—” character in the “RD:” field means that the module has been successfully read from the drive disks
while the “-” character means that a reading error occurred. Presence of the “—” character in the “ID:” field means that
module identifier found in its header matches the identifier used for selection of its position from the respective
modules table; however, the “-” character means that the identifier in the module header differs from the one in the
respective modules table. Identification error (“ID:” = “-”) during normal operation of a drive is allowed only for
modules belonging to the
”open modules table” because the latter in addition to other data contains links to copies of tables, at that the name of a
copy of course differs from the original name and respectively it does not match the information from the module
header. Besides the “open modules table” contains aliases for modules from “USAG”. In particular, “RDM1” serves as
alias for “RDMT”, “PDM1” stands for “PSHT”, etc.
Write/read firmware command allows to create a copy of a drive's firmware or record it to a drive from a
previously saved copy. NV-RAM is also saved during copying to a database, but it can be extracted from it to a file
only. It will not be copied to a drive during full firmware recording.
Ignore reading error command influences just the “Read modules” menu item. When the "Ignore reading
error" mode is on, red "IRE" indicator appears in the status bar of the utility. The said menu item allows to read
partially corrupt modules. If a drive error takes place while reading a module in normal mode the reading operation
stops and such module is placed into a modules' directory with a ".bad" extension, at that the file will contain only
sectors, which could be recovered from the drive without errors. If the utility encounters a reading error in the "IRE"
mode it saves to the file a sector filled with "DE AD" signature and continues reading the module. As usual, error-free
modules have ".rpm" extension while corrupt modules have ".bad" extension. "DE AD" signature allows identifying a
corrupt sector easily in any hex editor.
Read modules, Write modules commands allow to work separately with modules and "spaces". That feature
provides an opportunity to change contents of just one module or a selected group of modules without modifications to
the rest. The utility allows reading the modules in several modes; therefore it offers the following menu for mode
selection:
Any main copy
Copy 0
Copy 1
Factory copy
The “Any main copy” mode forces reading of copy 0 or, if it is corrupted, copy 1. The necessity for reading another
copy is determined by the utility analyzing module readability.
Selection of “Copy 0” or “Copy 1” modes forces reading of ONLY 0 or 1 copy respectively. In drives with
several heads copy 1 as a rule corresponds to head 1; in single-head drives it is usually located on another track. The
exact copy location is indicated by the address modifier byte in NV-RAM. Therefore recording to a single-head drive
NV-RAM from a drive with several heads in case of firmware problems may cause knocking sounds since the drive
will start looking for a copy using a non-existent head. That mode is useful when only copy 0 is damaged and data of a
single module contains garbage or when firmware modules have to be collected partially from one copy and partially
from another. Such a necessity is frequently caused by drastic firmware corruption. Disk rotation is likely to extend
module corruption in copy 1 to the following sector offering an opportunity to restore the module from copy 0 by
transferring the information from copy 1 through a hex editor. Enabling of the “Ignore reading errors” mode certainly
allows most complete utilization of that opportunity. WARNING! Not all the modules are present in copy 1, thus
they are listed in the zero copy reading mode only. In particular, the modules, which are listed in the “open
modules table” but not listed in “USAG” are unavailable in the copy 1 reading mode.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 5
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

Selection of the “Factory copy” mode provides access to modules recorded at the manufacturing factory to a
separate track unused by the drive.
WARNING! Only modules listed in “USAG” will be accessible in that mode. Besides, the SRVM module present
in that copy will differ from its actually operating counterpart as regards its adaptive part. Apparently the
difference is caused by final drive calibration performed after recording of the “factory copy”.
Load USAG command allows loading to the utility's memory of a selected modules’ directory without
recording it to a disk. That feature is useful while estimating the condition of a drive with corrupt “USAG” module.
Re-read module tables command loads USAG and a table of open modules. That feature may be useful for
utility readjustment for changes introduced to the firmware zone by user or a launched LDR file (no need to leave the
utility and start it again in cases when firmware zone is modified).
Cleaning of logs (ELG1, EVLG)command allows to clear a drive's error log (in 60GXP and 120GXP models
EVLG event log is also cleared). The feature is useful in cases of zero drive head overcommutation. It is necessary to
perform Clear SMART after finishing of this operation.

Clear FLYH command (derived from Fly Head) allows clearing the mechanical hits log in a drive. The log is
present in all drives described in this manual from 120 GXP (IC35AVVA) to earlier models.
Restore firmware zone command attempts to restore unreadable areas in drive's firmware zone. That menu
item is necessitated by the fact that firmware zone in IBM drives is scattered, i.e. there are areas between the modules,
which are not included into the module tables. Such areas mostly are either not utilized by the drive altogether or
contain SELFSCAN modules. At the same time a drive reads the firmware track to RAM completely during
initialization. Consequently, an attempt of initialization will end in error, if the track contains unreadable areas. Besides,
in cases of data restoration, when the most of own drive service data must be restored, there might arise a situation
when a part of some module essential for such data cannot be read, for example, in the final part containing no
information. In that case restoration will allow obtaining the required module with empty space instead of its previously
inaccessible area. And in some cases the actual data from the area will be restored, too. That menu item processes the
whole firmware in a drive, which is slower than reading modules in "IRE" mode (please, see "Ignore reading error"),
but its advantage is in the ability to attempt reading of an inaccessible sector using physical parameters during
restoration (at user's option). One more application aspect of that operation regards overcommutation of a drive's
system head (please see details in the "Modify configuration" section).
That menu item brings up a dialog window, where you can select drive heads for restoration, operation type
(restoration, clearing or extensive clearing), and number of retries using logical and physical parameters. If you select
"clear" or “extensive clear” operation type or 0 of retries, the firmware data area will be filled with 77h code. Selection
of the “extensive clear” menu item forces clearing in the style adopted in 1.07 version of the utilities. It is slightly safer
when a drive is damaged, but takes more time than plain clear operation. However, the statistics proves that it is
frequently necessary in order to restore the readability of firmware area. Thus we recommend using the “extensive
clear” option only in cases, when selection of common clearing procedure had no desired effect.
WARNING! Performing of this part can be potentially dangerous for HDD! If you have choosen Recovery and
HDD have a problem with heads the execution of this command can caused the damaging of service area or incorrect
writing into the correct sectors of service area. Moreover if you have choosen the Cleaning or Extended cleaning, the
microprogram can be erased. Therefore before performing of this operation you should save the maximum of
modules from all disc surfaces of HDD. For this can be useful paragraphs Load USAG (load into the utility table of
modules from the file ~USAG.rpm from compatible HDD) and Ignore reading error (allows while reading to get
maximum information of module, even if it has unreadable areas ). Remember that microprogram has great amount of
special information about this HDD and simple substitution of it by another HDD can caused inability to work of
repairing drive.
Create an LDR file menu item allows saving drive's firmware to a file in IBM LDR format. After selection of
that menu item you'll be prompted to enter a name for the LDR file. Since the file size is limited, tables of defects
(PSHT, RDMT) are saved in a separate file in LDR format under the same name but with ".dld" extension (i.e. in order
to restore original modules using the file you should rename it to *.ldr). Besides, another file with the same name and
".ldl" extension is created containing information about the drive and a list of modules recorded to the LDR file. If any
modules cannot be read, they will be skipped with subsequent listing of such cases in a report after the operation is
complete.
WARNING! The loader thus generated will differ from the original one since it will contain modules specific for
the individual drive and a complete NV-RAM block. If you wish to use the loader for firmware updating in
another drive you should copy the “native” SRVM module and NV-RAM of that drive after using the loader.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
6 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

Security subsystem menu item allows viewing information about user passwords and their resetting, i.e.
removal of passwords opening access to drive's data. The "Setup" item serves for modification of password module
location in a drive's memory. The address is presumably the same for the whole drive family, though it is likely that it
may differ in some firmware version.
Beginning with 40GV drive family some firmware versions employ an encryption mechanism for the
password module. Therefore the password reviewing routine will display an encrypted block of security module, which
cannot be used as password text.
Besides, beginning with 60GXP drive family password-protected drives block factory mode commands.
Therefore the algorithm of password removal becomes somewhat more complicated. During the process you'll have to
short-circuit data pins of NV-RAM (No. 5 and 6) to ensure drive's report on readiness without initialization of its
security subsystem. The said procedure is implemented in Wizard style, which allows to skip its detailed description
here.

2.2.2.3. “Modify configuration” command


"Modify configuration" menu item contains the following commands:
“Isolate heads”
“Head map change”
“Switch SA access”
“Isolate zones”.
“Isolate heads” command allows software deactivation of magnetic heads and modification of their
connection order. That command brings up a dialog window, where you can select the number and sequence for the
arrangement of heads in a drive. The utility automatically corrects the modifier byte for the address of a module copy in
NV-RAM. Thus, you do not have to worry about producing a single-head model, which might require presence of
module copies on a different track instead of head 1.
The dialog window in the utility designed for heads' table modification shows cells with numbers of heads
inside (from left to right). The leftmost cell contains the number of physical head, which the drive will use as its zero
head. For instance, if you record 2 in that cell, it will mean that drive firmware will use as zero head the one physically
connected to the second commutator line in the head and disk assembly.
The actual overcommutation mechanism is implemented in the utility as creation of an LDR file with necessary
modifications from the modules present in a drive. Specific character of the process requires a certain procedure in
cases, when the system head is changed (in case of "simple ending head(s) removal" starting an LDR file should
suffice). Let's describe the procedure:
generation of an LDR file from a given drive with definition of heads number, order, and file name;
1. clear firmware zone having selected the head, which should become the system head;
2. run an LDR file
3. clear firmware zone for the system (zero) head;
4. switch the drive power off and on;
5. run an LDR file;
6. switch the drive power off and on;
7. run an LDR file.
After completion of the operation do not forget to re-read the tables of modules (“Work with firmware zone” /
”Re-read module tables”).
The need to run an LDR file several times is determined by the fact that it contains the whole complex of
actions for overcommutation, which at the same time should be performed in several steps. Therefore intermediary
starts of an LDR file may complete with an error. If the final start of an LDR file finishes with an error, too, either of
the following has happened:
- NV-RAM was not overwritten during LDR file start;
- one of modules in firmware zone has not been overwritten during LDR file start;
- one of the original HDD modules contained garbage.
If an error resulted from impossibility to overwrite any module (it can be verified by looking through the report
on firmware structure), try to repeat the procedure from step 4.
If some modules in the original drive cannot be read or recorded you'll have to copy them subsequently from a
set of modules for a corresponding model. Here we should note that the mechanism modifies several modules so it is

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 7
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

likely that after their recording from another drive you may need to repeat the algorithm procedure again. Here belong
modules ZONE, SRVM, MLBA, and CNSL. A situation is possible, when none of modules can be read (when the
system head is damaged). In that case the LDR file would contain only corrected NV-RAM. Then you should perform
steps from 2 through 5, record to the drive corresponding firmware from a database or as modules, and switch power
supply to the drive off and on. Then perform the complete overcommutation procedure again from the first step.
“Head map change” command allows modification of heads mapping only in NV-RAM without readjustment
of other drive structures. Thus it is possible to define heads mapping filled, for example, with just one number using the
dialog box produced by the command. That may be useful for recovery of drives with corrupted sectors in firmware
area.
“Switch SA access” command inverts the high bit in the lower byte identifying firmware version in NV-RAM.
The operation grants access to drive modules in cases, when firmware area is corrupted so that during regular start such
drives either hang or start knocking with the heads. Previously for the same purpose it was recommended to find NV-
RAM of a similar, though not the same NV-RAM version containing heads’ map identical to the current NV-RAM.
The command functions as a trigger, i.e. running it twice successively will produce the original NV-RAM.
Isolate zones” command accomplishes isolation of zones in the beginning of a drive only. Its selection brings
up a dialog window, where you'll have to input the number of the first operational zone of the drive. Previously isolated
zones will be skipped. After successful performance of that operation you'll need to set the correct MaxLBA value
separately using the SetMaxLBA command in the PC3000AT utility. The new MaxLBA can be obtained with either of
two methods:
- calculate the number to deduct from the current MaxLBA taking into account the isolated zones;
- perform logical scanning and assume as new MaxLBA the value followed by continuous IDNF error zone.
Activation of drive zones is performed separately by means of recording a respective ZONE module in the "Write
modules" dialog; then you'll have to restore correct MaxLBA in the PC3000AT utility. The utility will display the
default MaxLBA value in the respective dialog window. Thus you may just confirm the value displayed by the utility
without any modifications.

2.2.2.4. “Run an LDR file” command


“Run an LDR file” command starts a “script” of firmware update. The function is somewhat similar to that in
Quantum drives, but it has several basic differences. That function has been designed for firmware version update in a
drive being initialized only. It will not achieve a temporary drive initialization by recording information into its RAM.
LDR file name corresponds to P - Code of firmware to replace the current firmware version, for example,
TX2DA59A.LDR. The structure of P - Code is as follows:
TX – drive family identifier;
2 – the number of magnetic heads;
A59A – firmware version.

WARNING! The first 6 characters in P - Code should never be changed, i.e. TX2DA50A can be replaced with
TX2DA59A, but not TX2DA69A.

2.2.2.5. Translator recalculation


Translator recalculation is a command that allows to transfer defects from G-List to P-List. Data from the user
area are lost in the process since the defects hiding is accomplished not through their relocation to reserved sectors but
through removal of defective sectors from the translation space. During such isolation of defects all the drive sectors
beginning from the first defect change their numbers. The so-called "candidate" defects (sectors with unstable reading
access) are ignored during the process because of some peculiarities in the operation of firmware co.
2.2.2.6. Spindle stop
Spindle stop is a command required for Hot Swap operations.

2.2.2.7. Enable write cache


This menu item is available in utilities for DTLA, AVER, and AVVA drive models because it is actually a
patch fixing an error in older utilities for those drives, where incomplete initialization of G-List (RDMT) resulted in

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
8 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

disabling the write-cache. Technically you could simply clear G-List using the current utility version, but we believed
that you might wish to preserve the original G-List of the drive sent for repair in order to facilitate a more complete user
data recovery.

2.2.3. Drive ID
Drive ID command allows to modify the information returned by a drive in response to drive ID request (drive
ID is read during PC loading procedure performed by system BIOS) and compare identification records from the
firmware zone and the drive labels.

2.2.4. Formatting

Formatting command performs translator recalculation and quick LBA surface overwriting using random code
from the sector buffer. The procedure ends with an error if it encounters a seriously damaged area. In order to perform
the formatting procedure you should enter the initial value and the number of LBA sectors in the range to be formatted.
Besides, you can define the utility behavior in case of errors. The following variants are possible:
- stop formatting when an error is encountered;
- skip several sectors (their number is entered in a dialog window by the user) when an error is encountered and
continue to a previously defined limit.
The need for the second mode is predetermined by the fact that 60GXP and newer models require completion of
formatting at the last accessible LBA from the user's data zone for normal subsequent work with such data.
Upon completion of formatting a report will be output listing zones skipped because of errors. Then logical
scanning of those zones with writing on must be performed.
Besides, that menu item allows to detect zones with considerably damaged servo fields, which can be hidden
then into "cylinder table" (please see "defects table”).
WARNING! Because of an error in firmware of IBM drives the formatting command leaves some LBA at disk
end unformatted. For safety reasons we did not modify the utility algorithm though it could enable the utility to
define block range greater than the one entered by the user. Thus after formatting you will need to add the final
range of a drive (2-3 tracks per head) using logical parameters.
WARNING! The command forces formatting of sectors in accordance with P-List, but actual recording is
performed over the whole disk surface with the exception of cylinders listed in the SRVM table, thus formatting
errors (corrupted servo fields, circular scratches, etc.) cannot be excluded by appending those defects to P-List.
As a last resort the corrupted area can only be isolated from the user data space by running the formatting
procedure manually and beginning with a location outside the corrupted area after the defects are added to P-
List. In such cases it is recommended to append to P-List the preceding and the following track in addition to
the one with actually damaged formatting.

2.2.5. Logical scanning


Logical scanning command scans the surface using logical parameters and adds the defects to G-List.
This utility version does not block drives' autoassign feature, thus a drive automatically adds discovered defects
to G-List itself. At that you can manually edit RDMT (G-List) and “cylinder table” (SRVM) (please see "defects
table").

2.2.6. S.M.A.R.T. table

S.M.A.R.T. table menu item allows to view the values of S.M.A.R.T. parameters, load them from a model
module, reset S.M.A.R.T. values1, and control thermal mode of head and disk assembly (HDA). You may also monitor
the changes of temperature in the process of random positioning. The "latency period" parameter controls the delay
between positioning to random LBA.

1 Information on SMART reset command has been kindly provided by Lev Koriagin (hdd3k@cef.spbstu.ru).
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 9
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

2.2.7. Defects table

The Defects table command brings up the following menu:


View defects table
Editor
Clear defects tables
View defects tables – allows to view cylinder defects table (SRVM), P-List (PSHT) and G-List (RDMT).
Within that menu you can select necessary tables using [SPACE] key. If none of the tables has been selected pressing
[ENTER] will display a table corresponding to the current cursor position.
WARNING! Because of some peculiarities of the interface used for creation of the utilities the maximum
number of lines available for displayed reports is 32767. Thus, if P-List contains more records, not all of them
will be displayed. However, the number of all the defects in the report header will be correct.
Editor menu item contains options “Cylinder table editor”, “RDMT editor”, “Load from defectoscope”. Let's
review each of them:
- “Cylinder table editor” – allows manual entrance and removal of selected cylinder defects. Peculiarities of
drive's firmware operation cause cylinders listed in the "cylinder defects table" to "disappear" from the address space of
the drive. Therefore modification of "cylinder table" renders the defects listed in P-List and G-List invalid; they have to
be cleared. Besides, in 60GXP and newer models cylinder defects are used to block a service zone located close to the
middle of disk radius. The utility indicates attempts to remove such defects with a beep and ignores them.
- “RDMT editor” – allows to edit the contents of RDMT (G-List) manually. Due to some reasons "translator
recalculation" is required after editing of RDMT; and the operation is performed automatically by the utility. This
menu item allows selection of actions to be performed over "candidate" defects: taking them into account during
editing, ignoring them or their preliminary export into an external file with the ".dft" extension (a list of defects in the
"defectoscope" utility format).
- “Load from defectoscope” option allows loading into RDMT a defects’ list created by the "defectoscope"
utility. Due to some reasons "translator recalculation" is required after loading of defects; and the operation is
performed automatically by the utility. Just as with the previous menu item, here you can select actions to perform over
the current "candidate" defects from G-List.
Clear defects table option allows to reset G-List (RDMT), P-List (PSHT), and “cylinder table” (SRVM). In this
menu you can select necessary tables using the [SPACE] key. If none of the tables has been selected pressing [ENTER]
will display a table corresponding to the current cursor position.
Attention! If you clear “cylinder table”, the defects listed in other tables (RDMT, PSHT) will become invalid and
will have to be cleared by the user, too.
Attention! In 60GXP and newer models a certain group of cylinder defects is used to block a service zone located
close to the middle of disk radius. The utility does not remove those defects while clearing a "cylinder table".

2.2.8. Automatic mode

Automatic mode command allows running test sequences (formatting, translator recalculation, scanning using
physical parameters, logical scanning and servo test) in arbitrary order with output of results. Automatic operation with
IBM drives does not differ from work with other drive types (see, for example, description for Fujitsu HDDs).

2.2.9. SELFSCAN
The SELFSCAN menu contains elements for control and status review of the so-called “SELFSCAN” routine.
SELFSCAN is a part of factory firmware stored in a drive and designed for drive self-testing and self-adjustment. In
IBM drives SELFSCAN performs adjustment of adaptive drive parameters and multi-pass surface scanning of the disks
with defects relocation. At that during the first pass the drive scans its firmware zone, during the second pass it scans
the user's data area and adds defects to the cylinder table, the third pass is used for scanning with defects entry into P-
List.
SELFSCAN menu consists of the following options:
Start SELFSCAN
Stop SELFSCAN

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
10 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

View state
View result
Read SELFSCAN module
Write SELFSCAN module
View MFG parameters
View HLRC data
View SRST dump table parameters
Read SELFSCAN log
Repair SELFSCAN module
Start SELFSCAN menu item serves for initialization of the SELFSCAN routine. After the initialization you
should connect the drive to an independent power supply and wait for the procedure completion. While waiting it is
possible to view SELFSCAN state – i.e. drive registers – in order to estimate information on the progress of
SELFSCAN.
WARNING! The command starting the SELFSCAN routine will automatically clear P-List and G-List, ELG1
and EVLG logs and reset SMART parameters.
WARNING! It is essentially important that you do not disconnect the power to the drive throughout the whole
procedure of SELFSCAN. If the SELFSCAN procedure is interrupted by a power shutoff, after the next power-
on SELFSCAN will restart with incorrect parameters since some of them are stored by the drive in RAM.
Therefore you should abort the incorrectly started SELFSCAN procedure using the Stop SELFSCAN command.
Then you can restart SELFSCAN.
Stop SELFSCAN menu item serves for termination of SELFSCAN procedure. Its selection brings up a wizard-
style sequence of windows guiding through the actions required to stop SELFSCAN.
View state menu item serves for reviewing the current status of SELFSCAN procedure. Its selection brings up a
window reflecting the contents of IDE registers, thus it allows identification of current SELFSCAN stage and surface
scanning position. SELFSCAN completion is manifested by the presence of a specific group of values in the “1x3” and
“1x4” drive registers. For DJNA and DPTA models it is “1x3” = 0x40, “1x4” = 0x11. For DTLA and newer models it
is “1x3” = 0x62, “1x4” = 0x11.
View result menu item allows checking the key word or error code after SELFSCAN completion.
Attention! That operation becomes available ONLY UPON COMPLEION of the SELFSCAN procedure.
The following key word variants are possible:
x “COMPFIN1”, “COMPLETE” – SELFSCAN completed successfully
x “ABORTED!” – SELFSCAN completed with an error
x “SELFSCAN” – SELFSCAN did not complete, it was terminated by the utility.
If SELFSCAN ends with an error the drive has to be restored manually using the formatting procedure, please
find extensively damaged areas and add them to the cylinder table, then perform standard procedure of defects search
(please see section 4.3.1). You can see some of SELFSCAN error codes:

Code Description
00 00 SELFSCAN completed successfully
01 01 SELFSCAN detected a defective head
02 02 overflow of track defects’ table
06 02 P-List overflow

Read SELFSCAN module menu item allows reading SELFSCAN module from a drive to a file.
WARNING! Together with the SELFSCAN module you should also copy the MFGP module containing
SELFSCAN parameters (available as "~@@01.rpm" module for drive families older than AVER, please see
Table 5 and a footnote thereto). SELFSCAN can be subsequently started normally only if a valid pair of MFGP
and SELFSCAN modules is available.
WARNING! Current version of the utility does not save the SELFSCAN module to the firmware database and
does not read it after selection of the "read modules" menu item, therefore the module should be saved
separately. Please note, besides, that the body of SELFSCAN module may contain empty sections that prevent
its reading but do not tell on its functionality. Correction of such situation is achieved through the Repair
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 11
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

SELFSCAN module menu item. When it is invoked, the utility reads a SELFSCAN module ignoring reading
errors and records it back. After that action you'll be able both to read the SELFSCAN module and attempt to
start it.
Write SELFSCAN module menu item serves for recording of a SELFSCAN module to a drive.
WARNING! Record to a drive SELFSCAN module belonging only to a corresponding firmware version AND A
CORRESPONDING DRIVE MODEL! Recording an unsuitable SELFSCAN module to a drive may lead to its
destruction (heads “knocking away”).
WARNING! While recording a SELFSCAN module keep in mind that its proper functioning depends on the
presence of the corresponding MFGP module containing SELFSCAN parameters. The “corresponding” module
here means that it must be copied from the same drive or, at least, from an identical model WITH THE SAME
NUMBER OF HEADS!
WARNING! In DTLA and newer drives starting SELFSCAN procedure when isolated heads are present will
cause an error since the module contains a record with a strictly defined number of heads. Therefore starting
the module requires copying the MFGP and SELFSCAN modules from a corresponding model with smaller
capacity.
View MFG parameters menu item will display a report on the current parameters of SELFSCAN (MFG
parameters).
View HLRC data menu item will display an interpretation for the factory report on drive test (HLR1 / HLR2
modules). It contains aggregated data about heads' status based on various tests. Probably, it may be modified by the
SELFSCAN routine. Those reports appeared beginning with the 60GXP (AVER) drive series.
View SRST dump table parameters menu item outputs a summary report on the tests performed by
SELFSCAN and compiled by the drive itself on the basis of its operation log.
Read SELFSCAN log menu item allows reading the SELFSCAN progress log as a binary file. Its interpretation
will be implemented in the utility later or we shall create a separate utility for its analysis.
Repair SELFSCAN module menu item is applicable when a SELFSCAN module contains empty buffer sections,
which do not influence the code itself or module data. If the SELFSCAN procedure does not start or the SELFSCAN
module cannot be read, please try this option prior to overwriting the "native" module, attempt to read the SELFSCAN
module and analyze its contents.
WARNING! Due to microprogram specifics SELFSCAN does not record all the defects. Therefore after
SELFSCAN completion you should perform formatting with subsequent standard defects search procedure
(please see section 4.3.1.).

3. Drive firmware

3.1. Structure of IBM HDD firmware


Firmware of IBM drives consists of a firmware portion stored in ROM, configuration data in NV-RAM and
loadable firmware portion with data from the service data zone of a drive (DISK firmware). Firmware is identified by
its version number and version code (please see Fig. 3.1). Firmware version number reflects its development. Firmware
version code is actually a project number.

Firmware version number


ROM (ASCII)
Firmware version code (HEX)

Firmware version number


NV-RAM (ASCII)
Firmware version code (HEX)

DISK Firmware version number


F/W (ASCII)

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
12 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

Firmware version code (HEX)


Figure 3.1. Structure of IBM HDD firmware.

Firmware is stored in masked ROM, which cannot be modified1. The whole modernization of firmware is performed
using the pair of NV-RAM + Disk F/W. Therefore IBM experts introduced the following rule for identification of new
versions: only firmware version NUMBER is changed while the firmware version CODE remains the same. At that
only the second pair of characters in the number is changed. For example, firmware version number before
modification might have been A46A. After update the version will change to A4xx, where xx stand for another two
characters.

Attention! Replacement with firmware from another drive family is not allowed.

Thus the sets (ROM+NV-RAM+Disk F/W) will be compatible if they conform to the following conditions:
- firmware version CODE is the same for ROM, NV-RAM, and Disk F/W;
- P - Codes in NV-RAM and Disk F/W match;
- firmware version NUMBER stored in ROM may differ from the number in NV-RAM and Disk F/W in the
last pair of characters only.

3.2. Compatibility of electronics printed circuit boards

Compatibility of PCBs can be conveniently identified using the label at IDE connector2 (see Fig. 3.1). If the
first symbols in the first two lines match, electronic parts are mostly compatible and are completely interchangeable.
Precise identification of compatibility can be performed using the information from ROM or NV-RAM3.

07N6544
H31718_
L5Y106
HBM5

Figure 3.2. Electronics PCB label at IDE connector.


NV-RAM contains the map of drive heads. Therefore PCBs from different models belonging to the same drive
family turn out to be incompatible. In order to adapt a PCB you should record NV-RAM from a corresponding model
into it. But the masked ROM version in the processor should match the version in NV-RAM and firmware modules
(please see section 3.1 “Structure of IBM HDD firmware”).
You can review version of PCB firmware using the command “View NV-RAM data” from the “Work with
NV-RAM” menu. P - Code of firmware looks as follows: ER2OA41A, where ER is the drive family code (please see
Table 2. “Family codes”), 2 – means the number of physical heads, A41A – represents the firmware version number.
Besides, the “View ROM data” item from the “Work with ROM” menu allows reviewing the basic firmware version
and its version code. Firmware data set for a given ROM with the smallest number actually recorded in that ROM chip
is viewed here as the basic version. For details on the structure of firmware version line refer to sections 2.2.2.1
“Work with ROM” and 3.1 “Structure of IBM HDD firmware”.

3.3. Description of structure and methods of firmware zone access in case of


malfunctions
Just as with many other drives, firmware in IBM drives is recorded in service tracks allocated to a separate
zone and consists of modules. The only considerable difference is the presence of non-volatile memory (NV-RAM)
with serial access on a PCB; memory size is 256 or 512 bytes. The memory contains an additional service module with
setup information adjusted for a specific model. One more difference is manifested in the presence of "open" service
modules that can be read and recorded without switching the drive to factory mode. A considerable part of the "open"
modules list is constituted by modules from USAG (the main table of drive modules). Besides the list contains

1 In drives from sample testing shipments firmware is not stored in masked ROM; instead it is loaded from serial Flash
ROM.
2 The code from IDE connector label is also recorded in PIDM "open" module.
3 Since NV-RAM may become corrupt or overwritten incorrectly it is safer to rely on information stored in ROM.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 13
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

additional modules used by the utilities distributed by the manufacturer for diagnostics of malfunctions. A large part of
those additional modules is not necessary for drive functioning. Some spaces are just allocated for modules, but contain
nothing, producing an error at an attempt to read such space. All the main functional parts are located in a protected
firmware zone described in the USAG module.
The data in firmware zone can be subdivided into four categories:
- RSVD module, present in none of the tables containing modules; it marks the beginning of a service track.
- Modules listed in the USAG table. All the modules are critical for drive operation.
- Records that are not included into USAG table but participate in factory self-testing.
- A part of open firmware data, which does not intersect with the group of modules from USAG (the table of
open modules contains, apart from the rest, references to a large number of USAG modules required for functioning of
the manufacturer's testing utilities).
After the “Check firmware structure” command is issued, both the closed and open parts of firmware are read.
Besides, the "spaces" in the main and additional service tracks are checked (a "space" is a service track portion, which
is not occupied by any module from the lists). The "RD" label indicates, whether a module could be read. “RD: —”
appears, if the module has been read, otherwise you'll see “RD: -”. The “ID” label reflects whether a module identifier
in the table of modules matches its identifier contained inside the actual module body. We should note that the table of
"open modules" contains, apart from the rest, aliases of modules (for example, the main copy of the RDMT module in
the table of "open" modules in named RDM1, and a copy thereof is called RDM2).
The command also outputs the table of zone allocation and some other parameters. The purposes of some
firmware modules are listed in tables 4 and 5.

Table 4. Functional purpose of some «closed» modules.


Module identifier Purpose
PSHT Factory table of defects (P-List).
RDMT Growing table of defects (G-List).
RLBA Extension to the zone allocation table.
ZONE Zone allocation table.
RAM0 Resident firmware.
OVR1 Resident firmware.
SMRT Module with S.M.A.R.T. values
MLBA LBA parameters.
PSWD or SECI Module containing passwords and security settings.
IDNT Drive ID.
USAG Table of modules' location within the service data area.
RSVD Mark of firmware data beginning
SRVM Table of skipped cylinders
Table 5. Functional purpose of some «open» modules.
RDM1 Alias of RDMT
RDM2 Copy of RDMT
PIDM Module containing information from the labels of PCB and HDA.
PDM1 Alias of PSHT
PDM2 Copy of PSHT
DDD0 Log of DDD utility
ELG1 Log of the drive defects' table.
EVLG Event Log
@@01 or MFGP1 MFG parameters – the module containing SELFSCAN parameters
You should take into account during firmware analysis that there is no checksum in the modules; therefore it is
quite difficult to identify structural corruption of firmware modules.
IBM drives can read and record firmware data with a partially initialized PCB (initialization from NV-RAM is
required; firmware loading from the service data area is not necessary for manipulations with modules), therefore if

1 The MFGP module appeared in the “open modules table” beginning with AVER drive family only. For earlier models
it is available as a “space” module “~@@01.rpm” in the “open modules table”.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
14 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

some modules in a drive cannot be read, such problem can easily be identified after looking through a report on
firmware zone structure.
If a drive switches to "endless knocking" after an attempt to read firmware data, you can proceed as follows:
disconnect the spindle motor control cable between the PCB and HDA and wait until the drive reports on
readiness. Here we should note that the said procedure is inapplicable for 120GXP drives, since they do not report on
readiness without a HDA.
In that case you'll have to use another method:
1. having switched the drive off first, short-circuit the 5th and the 6th pins of NV-RAM, then switch the
drive's power supply on with the short-circuit between the said pins. After a few seconds the drive should report on
readiness. Then remove the short-circuit bridge.
2. select the “Switch SA access” option in the menu “Work with firmware zone / Modify configuration”
After that the drive will be correctly initialized from NV-RAM but having read USAG with a different version it will
terminate further loading. However, its firmware zone will be accessible for analysis.
Then we should perform diagnostics of firmware zone (DISK F/W). For that purpose we shall read modules from the
drive one by one using the "Firmware", "Work with firmware zone", "Read modules" menu. The module causing
knocking sounds during the procedure is damaged.
Besides, we should mention the so-called Safe Mode of IBM drives. A drive is switched to that mode by a special
jumper configuration (please see section 4). The drive allows reading and recording NV-RAM in that mode, but rejects
commands for work with disk surface. Consequently the Safe Mode can be used as an alternative to the method of
"short-circuit" in order to modify NV-RAM. The Safe Mode interacts differently with the firmware zone in different
drive families.

while addressing firmware zone firmware overlays are read and started, performing complete
22GXP, 34GXP,
drive initialization. Thus, if firmware zone is corrupt, the drive may enter the "endless
37GP
knocking" mode
40GV and newer attempts to access firmware zone are ignored.
Thus Safe Mode cannot be used for testing and restoration of corrupt data in firmware zone.
While working with firmware zone you should keep in mind information from the following sections of this
manual:
- Work with ROM (please see review of a report on ROM and NV-RAM)
- Work with firmware zone

You may use the following scheme as a general guideline for discovery of possible malfunctions:

Check:
Yes The spindle No
- NV-RAM
spins up - PCB
- motor

No The drive produces Yes


knocking sound
with its heads

- a part of module or a space between modules - problem with commutator


cannot be read from the main firmware track - problem with heads
- missing RSVD, USAG (unparking without - problem with electronics
recalibration), though access to firmware data - RSVD and USAG are present, but modules are
is still available. damaged

While checking NV-RAM you should pay attention to the following aspects:
- Identifier must be “E2PR”
- Firmware version number must match ROM version (please see the section on viewing a report about ROM and NV-
RAM)
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 15
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

Firmware version code must match the ROM code (please see the section on viewing a report about ROM and NV-
RAM)
Mapping of drive heads must correspond to the one typical of that drive family, if the drive hasn't been previously
repaired with overcommutation of heads – or it should at least have a certain sense. For example, it may never contain
references to non-existent points of connection to the commutator (for instance, for the 33rd head).
Besides you should keep in mind that NV-RAM contains a checksum and if NV-RAM gets corrupt the drive will
terminate loading procedure having discovered a checksum mismatch. In that case you can record from a database to
the drive NV-RAM having corresponding type and version. In cases when NV-RAM structural corruption has caused
malfunctioning of the device, the drive will spin up the spindle and attempt to load firmware from disks' surface as soon
as its power supply is turned on.
Checking of firmware modules is accomplished through the menu items "Firmware / Check firmware structure”. If a
part of any module is unreadable, the testing report will reflect inaccessibility of a respective module. In such cases you
should overwrite corrupt modules using database as the source of modules collected from a corresponding drive type
with a matching firmware version using the guidelines on modules critical for user's data and the drive itself and
described in this manual. You should bear in mind that firmware modules in IBM drives have no checksum, which
makes identification of corrupt modules somewhat more complicated.
It is worthwhile to review individually the cases of damage to the “RSVD” module when the “RSVD” marker
is present in it, but the module body is filled with “garbage”. In such cases a drive behaves as though its heads are
malfunctioning, making it impossible to restore its functionality using regular methods. Let us describe the case and the
procedure for drive repair.
Problem: the drive cannot find the firmware, it produces typical sounds, the drive cannot write anything, i.e. behaves
as though recording is disabled for all its heads and:
1) a part of firmware got corrupted
2) all of the firmware got corrupted
3) reading has become disabled for all the heads
Cause: logical corruption of the RSVD module, when the RSVD marker is present in its due place, but the remaining
information is invalid.
Recovery procedure:
x Set the Safe Mode jumpers (or disconnect the motor controller cable for DJNA, DPTA) and create an
alternative loader with heads mapping where another head is substituted into the position for the zero head.
You could try to use head 1. Return the jumpers to the regular position, switch the power on and wait until the
drive reports on readiness. It would be useful to inspect NV-RAM, too (just in case).
x Run the loader to switch the order of heads’ assignment.
x The drive should report on readiness, but you will see a message telling that the modules’ table could not be
read.
x Clear the drive using all the heads.
x Switch the drive power off and on and clear the firmware zone again.
x Record the native NV-RAM, clear the firmware zone.
x Switch the drive power off and on and clear the firmware zone again.
¾Record NV-RAM, the CORRECT RSVD, USAG
¾Record the remaining modules
¾Run the loader with modules (not the one switching heads mapping, but the loader containing modules to be
recorded). This action will additionally ensure normal recording of the modules.
x Record PSHT, RDMT
x Switch the drive power off and on
¾Clear the firmware zone.
¾Record RSVD, USAG
¾Record the remaining modules
¾Run the loader containing modules.
x Record PSHT, RDMT
WARNING! The listed actions marked by an arrow are to be performed at once, without a prior switching of the power
off/on or restarting the utility.

3.4. Critical modules for drive data

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
16 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

The following are modules essential for drive data in IBM HDDs: PSHT, RDMT, SRVM, ZONE, CNSL,
MLBA (please see Table 2). Besides, you should remember about the requirement of conformity to the heads mapping
in NV-RAM.

4. Description of IBM drive families


Drive families are grouped according to their similar construction peculiarities and methods of their repair.

4.1. Construction peculiarities of 22GXP(DJNA7), 34GXP(DPTA7), and 37GP(DPTA5)


drive families

90G0653
1

1
N37951H4-

923B-130
90G1267

5100HP

M51181650-
2 3
50TK

1. IBM36 JAPAN AMSRC04 03 TQA7BB.6C 1C23081TQA


2. 25.0 Mhz
3. NV-RAM S93C56

Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Figure 4.1. External view of controller board in the DJNA drive family.
Table 1 demonstrates the model composition of drive families. Junior model in the family contains 4 heads.
The maximum number of disks for those drive families is 5.
Two ROM chips are present on the PCB:
- Masked ROM integrated with the processor. It contains the executable processor code and default setup
values.
- Flash ROM with serial access - NV-RAM. It contains setup parameters for access to the drive's firmware
zone. Its type is S93C56, size – 256 bytes.
In case of processor malfunction the PCB is unable to report on readiness without HDA. At the utility launch
you'll see a message "Error reading NV-RAM". If the processor is functioning the PCB will always report on readiness
without a HDA (only DRDY and DSC LEDs in status register will be illuminated) independently from NV-RAM
contents.
If firmware modules could not be read, you'll see the following messages: "Modules table cannot be read.
Continue?" and "Error reading zone allocation module. Default zone allocation used". If the drive unparks its heads
during the procedure and you do not hear knocking sounds the error is most likely in the firmware data. In that case you
can perform the "Check firmware structure" command and see, which modules have been damaged.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 17
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

If modules can be read, but contain incorrect information, you can overwrite them using the "Write modules"
command from the menu for work with firmware zone.
PCBs have several firmware versions located in masked ROM inside the processor. Matching firmware
versions are compatible. Besides, two last characters in the firmware version and ROM version number may be
different (please see section 3.1 “Structure of IBM HDD firmware”). Installation of PCB from one drive family to a
HDA from another is impossible in principle because masked ROM and different chips are used for reading/writing and
motor control. If there is a need to transfer a PCB from a drive with a different number of heads but containing the
same processor ROM version you should eliminate the difference, i.e. NV-RAM contents. It is possible to read /write to
NV-RAM on a separate board without a connected HDA. For that purpose it would be sufficient to disconnect the cable
to spindle motor and wait until the PCB reports on readiness.
If one or more magnetic heads are malfunctioning, the drive enters a continuous cycle, during which it keeps
knocking the magnetic-head assembly against the limiting stop. If the heads are functioning and the problem is caused
by incorrect firmware data the drive will report on readiness quite quickly after the knocking sounds.

4.2. Construction peculiarities of 40GV(DTLA5), 75GXP(DTLA7), 60GXP(AVER), and


120GXP(AVVA) drive families
90G2018

IBM36 IREL
AMSRC04 03
TQA7BB.6C
06K2869 PQ

2
90G2232

007AT00
N37980F8-
3000HP

1. 33.3 ɆȽɰ
2. NV-RAM S93C66
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Figure 4.2. External view of controller board in the DTLA-7 drive family.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
18 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

1. NV-RAM S93C66
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Safe mode

Figure 4.3. External view of controller board in the DTLA-5, AVER, and AVVA drive families.
Table 1 demonstrates the model composition of drive families. Junior model in the family contains 2 heads
(sometimes you may encounter factory-refurbished drives with 1 head). The maximum number of disks for those drive
families is 5. In those models glass disks are used since the accuracy of smooth surface production is higher for glass
than for aluminum.
Two or three ROM chips are present on the PCB:
- Masked ROM integrated with the processor. It contains the executable processor code and default setup
values.
- Flash ROM with serial access - NV-RAM. It contains setup parameters for access to the drive's firmware
zone. Its type is S93C56, size – 512 bytes.
- The third ROM chip is not always present on a PCB. Those Flash ROM chips were used in sample testing
shipments of drives with firmware recorded in serial Flash ROM instead of a masked ROM, which fact allowed
correction of errors in ROM code. The socket for that chip is located near NV-RAM. Its size is 1 Mbit, type -
25FV101T.
Unlike the previous drive families incorrect information in NV-RAM may result in PCB "hanging" preventing
it from reporting on readiness. In such case you may use the methods listed in section 3.3 “Description of structure and
methods of firmware zone access in case of malfunctions” in order to bring the drive out from the "endless knocking"
state and make it report on readiness. After the drive reports on readiness you must record correct NV-RAM to it. It is
recommended to perform that operation having first launched the utility without a drive so as to exclude sending of
additional commands, for example, drive ID request and software reset.
A drive with corrupt modules behaves similar to drives from the previously described families.
The drive families in question use heads' parking not on disks, as it used to be, but at the external edge of the
disks – on a special polymer stand. Sometimes such method causes complete notching of disks in cases when a head
either gets bent during its entrance/exit or when it hits under the parking stand guide. Heads also quite frequently get
"stuck" remaining on disks.
If a drive demonstrates defects that disappear during the recording process, it is convenient to repair it using
"factory formatting". It replaces the process of overwriting the whole drive space and it is performed with the maximum
speed possible since no data or control commands are sent from/to the drive. The duration of a complete factory format
cycle is 25 minutes for 40Gb AVER drive.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 19
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

As a matter of fact, such situations when corrupt sectors appear result most frequently from lack of contact
between the PCB and HDA connector. The case is that the contact between electronic circuitry and the PCB is
accomplished through a pin connector under the board located near the power connector. However, PCBs mounting is
quite unreliable in those drives, as a result mechanical influences or thermal deformations cause perforation of tin
contact pads under the contact pins, which thus cease to provide adequate connection. Therefore prior to the repair it is
necessary to caulk the contact pads by soldering.
This manual is supplemented with a part of a drive's circuit diagram showing the portion controlling the
spindle motor rotation and the voice coil together with a scheme of parts location and their labeling.

4.3. Software repair

4.3.1. Identification and relocation of defects in user's area

Mechanisms of software relocation of defective sectors provided in the utility allow to hide defects in G-List
using the "autoassign" method and also perform manual editing of G-List (RDMT) and “cylinder table” (SRVM).
Please refer to "Defects table" section for details on respective features.
In case of insignificant damages the algorithm of defects relocation is quite simple:
In case of insufficient contact in the connector refer to section 6 “Malfunctions of electronics boards in IBM drives.” in
this manual for diagnostics of that malfunction and a description of the main electronic circuitry defects.
1. Perform factory format. If it completes normally (without errors), there is no serious damage.
2. Perform logical scanning and relocate defects to G-List. Testing using physical parameters presently does not
add defects automatically to relevant tables.
3. Perform translator recalculation if any defects have been discovered. During the process defects from G-List
will be moved to P-List and G-List will be cleared. We should note that candidate defects will not be transferred from
G-List to P-List due to specific operation of the transfer feature algorithm implemented in the drive itself. It is
explained in particular by the fact that a drive views candidate defects just as areas with unstable access. If you still
wish to transfer candidate defects to P-List enter the RDMT editor (menu “Defects table./ Editors”) and respond
"Transfer" to the question regarding action to perform with candidate defects – and save the table immediately.
Translator recalculation will be carried out automatically after that.
4. Perform logical scanning once again. If any defects are discovered, return to step 3.
Factory formatting, apart from its other features, allows to localize considerably damaged servo fields that may
subsequently be hidden to the "cylinder table”. Specific manner of firmware operation after modification of "cylinder
table" requires to clear ɨɱɢɫɬɤɢ P-List and G-List since such modification invalidates the defects listed in those tables.
Besides, defects that have not been eliminated using the "autoassign" mechanism can be added to G-List
(RDMT) manually using an internal editor. Specific character of that operation requires to perform translator
recalculation started automatically by the utility after editing.
It is also to load a list of defects created by "defectoscope" software. For details refer to section 2.2.7 "Defects
table”.

4.3.2. Malfunctions of “Open modules' table cannot be read!” type

The table of open modules is a synthetic one, i.e. it does not exist as an actual integral block of data on disk surface.
The table of open modules is generated from the OVR4 overlay (OVR1 module contains several overlays, including
OVR4) based on drive geometry. The table itself is returned by the drive in response to a special command that does
not belong to the group of factory commands. Consequently, the impossibility to obtain the table from a drive results
from its incomplete initialization. The situation may arise for a number of reasons.
1. Unreadability of RSVD.
2. Unreadability of a module from USAG.
3. “Garbage” in a USAG module.
4. Unreadability of a sector (space) between modules.
5. Corruption of NV-RAM image on disk surface (beginning of WRT0 module).
6. Incompatibility between firmware modules that resulted from incorrect firmware update or incorrect repair.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
20 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

Problems 1- 3 are solved by overwriting of respective modules from compatible firmware.


Problem 4 can be solved using the "Repair firmware zone" menu item or by recording corresponding "spaces" from a
collection of modules.
Problem 5 is fixed by recording to a drive of its own NV-RAM (you should first read it to a file and then record the file
to NV-RAM). The drive itself will write it to the firmware zone at the beginning of WRT0 module.
Problem 6 can actually be solved by comparison with a sample collection of modules having excluded first individual
modules of a drive, which will have to be analyzed based on their purpose.
Thus the general procedure in case of such malfunction is as follows:
1. record to a drive its own NV-RAM.
2. having checked firmware zone structure identify damaged modules and "spaces" and, if they are present,
overwrite them with corresponding firmware.
3. If necessary, perform firmware zone restoration. In order to speed up the procedure you may clear firmware
zone and record the drive's own modules back to it. Attention! In that case some original modules, unreadable modules
and a part of "open" modules in particular, will be lost.
If the listed operations did not solve the problem, there might be sense in looking for modules containing "garbage" or
incompatible modules with further additional diagnostics of controller board and drive's HDA.

4.4. Peculiarities of software restoration

When firmware data gets corrupt a drive frequently enters the state of endless knocking with its heads against
the limiting stop, endless waiting, etc., i.e. conditions making software repair impossible. In those cases it is necessary
to prevent the drive's attempt of loading firmware data from disks' surface, still preserving access to firmware zone. It is
necessary to modify NV-RAM header, namely firmware version number, to achieve that goal. However, it requires at
least the ability to read/write to NV-RAM. Different models of IBM drives differ from each other as regards the
methods of accomplishment of that task. The methods and description of NV-RAM header modification are in the
section 3.3. "Description of structure and methods of firmware zone access in case of malfunctions". Here we show the
table of applicability for the described methods as regards different drive.
Disconnection of spindle Short-circuit of NV-RAM
Model/method Safe Mode1
control cable pins
22GXP(DJNA7),
34GXP(DPTA7), + + +
37GP(DPTA5)
40GV(DTLA5),
+ + +
75GXP(DTLA7)
60GXP(AVER),
- + +
120GXP(AVVA)

5. Auxiliary utility files for IBM drives


The main *.exe utility files of the complex are supplemented by auxiliary service files. The names of those
files coincide with utility name while their extension corresponds to the file type:
/utility’s name/.rsc – firmware resources' database file used for hardware data writing/reading and included in
the supplied kit;
/utility’s name/.log – text file for the drive test results generated by the utility at the first program launch and
appended with every subsequent drive test. The file contains all the settings and test results. Data on the automatic drive
test performance is also written to this file;
/utility’s name/.sma – file contains the "SMRT" module containing factory values of S.M.A.R.T. attributes. It
is used in the SMART parameters reset operations.
/utility’s name/.ldr – firmware update file.
Other file names are selected by user, but their extensions are determined by the utility depending on their
types:

1 In Safe Mode only reading/writing to NV-RAM is possible, work with surface is prohibited.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 21
Ɋɋ-3000 £
"IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP ¤ ACELab

*.tsk – task file, which is used for settings’ saving in automatic test mode;
*.bin – file contains firmware for the drive’s ROM, and it is created during firmware reading from ROM;
*.rpm – technological files of the drives' resident firmware modules. During the reading procedure they are
copied to the directory “IBMxxMOD”, where xx represents drive family identifier; (*.bad – modules that have been
read with an error)
*.log files can be viewed as regular text files; *.bin files can be viewed as binary files using a hex editor.

6. Malfunctions of electronics boards in IBM drives.


Here we shall review a brief list of electronic elements from the controller board that may cause errors in drive
operation.
Undoubtedly the most troublesome part is the pin connector between the controller board and HDA. The case
is that PCB's mounting is quite unreliable in those drives, as a result mechanical influences or thermal deformations
cause perforation of tin contact pads under the contact pins, which thus cease to provide adequate connection. It leads
to appearance of numerous "phantom" BAD sectors and even to corruption of firmware data on disks' surface.
Therefore prior to the repair it is necessary to caulk the contact pads by soldering. Then you should either perform
formatting or recording using the logical parameters in order to eliminate "phantom" errors.
Ceramic resonator near the microprocessor and the 35th contact of IDE connector. Generation presence is
tested with an oscilloscope.
Interface connector. Here problems may arise because of poor soldering quality and also because of
malfunctions in low-resistance transmission resistors located nearby.
Power elements of voltage stabilization and their coils. There is no separate voltage stabilization chip on the
board. The function is performed by one of the units in the spindle and positioner's voice coil controller chip. That
malfunction results in 5 V voltage instead of 3,3 V. It may not only burn out the elements from the electronics board
but also damage the commutator inside HDA. If data must be restored from such drive you'll have to replace the
magnetic head assembly inside the HDA.
Flash ROM containing firmware in drives from sample testing shipments.
NV-RAM. Its electrical damage or damage to data contained therein render the drive inoperative.
RAM chip.

7. Electric circuit diagram

7.1. Elements layout

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
22 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab "IBM" 22GXP, 34GXP, 37GP, 40GV, 75GXP, 60GXP, 120GXP

C1
R13 C65

C28
C45
R49

C9

C31
R10
R42

C64
C63

C52
C67
C78 Q2 C53 C62

R45
R39

90G2018
R12 C51 R50
C8 C66

R38

C49

C58 C38 C61


C79 R58 R55 C68 C50

C60 C35
C26 C33 R41
C7 R24 R53 R37
R23 R52 C32
R11
R51 C30 C36

C59

R1 R48
C25 C23

R47
C24 R40

C48
C22 R30
C6
R29

D1
R82 C21 C56

R56
C54

R27

R28
R8

C39
C46
Q1 R46 C11
R21 C27
U6 R4
ɋ5

C47

C56
R20 R18

D2
C29 C57
C2 R50 1

C42
U9

C43

C44
R17
R26

C41
L1 R25 J3
C20
R6 R7 C19
R5 R31
C88 R16 IBM36 IREL
C70

C18 C40
R36

AMSRC04 03 R19
Q3 C17 TQA7BB.6C C37
R9 06K2869 PQ
R3 C12 C69
R2
R22

C34

C36

R35
C10

R14
R25

7.2. Electric circuit

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 23
5 4 3 2 1

LS1
1
2 C54 C55 C48
3
4
D1
3 SPINDLE MOTOR
2 C27
D D
1
C39
D2
C58 3
2
1
C29

12v
R40

C56 R46 R47


R41

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
C59 U1
VCM1

P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
P59
P58
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
P49
1 P1 P48 48 VCM2
C 2 P2 P47 47 C
C57 3 46
P3 P46
4 P4 P45 45
5 44 12v
C11 P5 P44 C50
6 P6 P43 43
7 P7 P42 42
R1 8 41
P8 P41 R42
9 P9 P40 40
C38 10 39
P10 P39 C49
11 P11 P38 38
R48 12 37
C60 P12 P37 C51 R45
13 P13 P36 36
14 P14 90G2018 P35 35
R50 C52
15 P15 P34 34
16 P16 P33 33
C62 R39
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32 C33 C36
B B
C63
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

C53
c109
R49 C64 C67
R10
C65 C66
m37(106)
5v U9

m37(99) 2 IN OUT 3 +3.3v


Vref

D1758
m37(101)

ibm36(18) R37
1

5v
m37(102)

m37(103)
A A

m37(100) C1 C28 C68 Title


IBM SCHEMATIC
m37(96) C9 C45
Size Document Number Rev
R13 A PC-3000 0

Date: Monday, October 21, 2002 Sheet 1 of 1


5 4 3 2 1
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Western Digital

Western Digital
Classification of WD drive families
Western Digital is the oldest manufacturer of hard disk drives and their components. Thus, WD belongs to the
leading companies developing and manufacturing system controllers, which it uses in its HDDs. Therefore it is
customary to subdivide the generations of WD HDD models according to their architecture (Arch.), which depends first
of all upon the circuitry solutions used in the system controller.

1. Nomenclature of products
A drive’s family and capacity can be identified by its name. The first generation of WD IDE drives was called
Centaur and consisted of 4 drive families. The models of the first four families were labeled as follows:

WD 9 5 04 4 A
Form factor: Peculiarities: Seek time: Interface type:
Western Digital 3,5" 3 - type 1 Capacity, x10, Mb 8 - 70 ms A - AT
5 – type 2 4 - 28 ms X - XT
E.g.: WD93048A, WD95044A

The second generation of WD HDDs consisted of more than 50 families identified as follows:
WD A C 3 3100
Interface type: B - Tadbit 2.5"
Western Digital A - ATA C - Caviar The number of Capacity, Mb
C - PCMCI D - Portfolio 3.0' disks in the head-
Ph - Portable IDE E - Enterprise 3.5" and-disk assembly
ɇɟɬ - SCSI L - Lite 2.5"
U - Ultra Lite 1.8"
E.g.: WDAC2120, WDAC35100A, WDE4360, PhD2100, WDCU140

Beginning with the 20.5 GB model in WD205AA drive family the labeling of models was changed to the one used
nowadays:

WD 2000 B B - 32 AA A0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. WD
Western Digital
2. Capacity
200,0 GB (up to 999,9 GB maximum)
3. Rotational speed of the disks
letters A-E are assigned to EIDE
A - 5400 rpm (WD Caviar 5400)
B - 7200 rpm (WD Caviar 7200)
C - 10'000 rpm
D - 4500 rpm (WD Spartan)
E - 5400 rpm (WD Protege)
letters F-Z are assigned to SCSI and specialized HDDs
F - 10'000 rpm, 2 Mb cache
G - 10'000 rpm, 8 Ɇɛɬ cache
H - 10'000 rpm, 4 Ɇɛɬ cache
J - 7200 rpm, 8 Ɇɛɬ cache
K - 7200 rpm (Performance)
L - 7200 rpm (Fluid Bearing Motor)
M - 5400 rpm (Fluid Bearing Motor)
N - 5400 rpm (WD Protégé - Fluid Bearing Motor)

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Western Digital ¤ ACELab

P - 7200 rpm, 8 Mb cache (Fluid Bearing Motor)


Q-Z - reserved
4. Interface
letters A-E are assigned to EIDE
A - ATA-66
B - ATA-100
C - FireWire
D - Serial ATA
E - ATA-133
letters F-V are assigned to SCSI and specialized HDDs
F - Fibre Channel
G - Ultra2 (68 pin)
H - Ultra2 (80 pin)
J - Ultra160 (68 pin)
K - Ultra160 (80 pin)
L - Ultra3 (68 pin)
M - Ultra3 (80 pin)
N - Ultra SE (50 pin)
P-V - reserved
A/V product for home use, letters W-Z
W - A/V for home use
X-Z - reserved
5. Customer ID
00 - Generic 60 - Compac
10 - DEC 80 - Motorola
11 - WD Protégé OEM 90 - Distribution Only
12 - Intel 95 - Tektronix
18 - Dell 99 - Boeing
23 - IBM
25 - Toshiba
28 - Microsoft
32 - Reseller
35 - WD Spartan
40 - Apple
44 - WD Protégé Other
6. Family identifier
Lower descriptor of the engineering denomination of an HDD. It reflects the differences in the configuration
of one and the same device and is useful during replacement of some parts, which are compatible if their
family identifiers match.
7. Customer Configuration Code - CCC
X0, X1, X2… - device version for testing purposes
A0 – first high-quality sample
B0, B1, C0, C1 – models for specific resellers
Ax, Bx, Cx, Ex - WD Caviar
Fx, Gx, Hx, Jx - WD Protégé
Kx, Lx, Mx, Nx - WD Performer
Remark: X0 – pre-production phase
A0 – production phase, then the revision number grows: first from 0 to 9, then letters follow (except
for letters I, O and Q)

2. Identification of drive families

2.1. Identification of WD Arch-0.. Arch-IV HDD family


Prior to the 20.5 GB model of WD205AA drive family (Arch-V) each family of Western Digital drives was
identified by an individual number assigned to that family during the design stage. The number could be used to
identify the electronics boards compatible with a certain drive family and to select a corresponding utility for testing

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Western Digital

purposes. The number used to be indicated on microprocessor package or on a paper label over the ROM chip (if
external ROM is used), it consists of three parts:
62-xxxxxx-yyy, where:
62 – indicates that the device belongs to magnetic hard disk storage type,
xxxxxx – six-digit number indicating the drive family,
yyy – three-digit number indicating firmware version.
E.g.: ROM number 62-602208-064 corresponds to the WDAC 33100 drive family.
Please see the table of correspondences below:
Table 2.1.
HDD architecture HDD family Family number Testing utility
WD 450AA 62-001003-xxx pca450aa.exe
WD 307AA Blank pca307aa.exe
Arch-V
WD 272AA Blank pca272aa.exe
WD 205AA 62-602234-xxx pca205aa.exe
WDAC 313000A 62-602233-xxx pca31300.exe
WDAC 310100A 62-602230-xxx pca31010.exe
Arch-IV
WDAC 38400A 62-602225-xxx pca38400.exe
WDAC 36400A 62-602220-xxx pca36400.exe
Arch-III WDAC 35100A 62-602221-xxx pca35100.exe
WDAC 34000A 62-602210-xxx pca34000.exe
WDAC 33100A 62-602208-xxx, pca33100.exe
62-602222-xxx
WDAC 32500A 62-602214-xxx, pca32500.exe
62-602215-xxx,
62-602203-xxx
Arch-II WDAC 31600A 62-602111-xxx pca31600.exe
WDAC 21200A 62-602202-xxx, pca21200.exe
62-602209-xxx
WDAC 2850A 62-602110-xxx, pcac2850.exe
62-602200-xxx
WDAC 2700A 62-602107-xxx pcac2700.exe
WDAC 31200A 62-602108-xxx pca31200.exe
WDAC 31000A 62-602101-xxx pca31000.exe
WDAC 2540A 62-602104-xxx pcac2540.exe
WDAC 2420A 62-602103-xxx, pcac2420.exe
62-602084-xxx
Arch-I
WDAC 2340A 62-602082-xxx, pcac2340.exe
62-602083-xxx,
62-602091-xxx
WDAL 2170A 62-602085-xxx pcal2170.exe
WDCU 140A pccu140.exe
WDAC 2200A 62-600059-xxx pcac2200.exe
Arch-0 WDAC 2120A 62-600060-xxx pcac2120.exe
WDAC 280A 62-600031-xxx pcac280.exe
Centaur Family WD9xxxxA - pcwd9x.exe
Beginning with Arch-V generation WD discontinued marking the ROM chip with an identification code
(although those marks was preserved in some Arch-V drive families, please see Table 2.1). It complicated drive family
identification and really impeded identifying the firmware version necessary to ensure compatibility between the
electronics board and a head-and-disk assembly or interchangeability between different boards. Most likely it resulted
from the fact that WD began using FLASH ROM instead of 27ɋɯɯɯɯ one-time-programmable chips, recording
firmware to ROM after board assembly.

2.2. Identification of WD Arch-V (WDxxxAA) HDD family


WD Arch-V drive families in a certain sense illustrate the transition from the old identification method to the
new one. Thus the older identification was preserved in WD205AA and WD450AA drive families (please see section
2.1). The labels over ROM chips were also preserved in the WD272AA and WD307AA drive families, but in most
cases they are left without any marks.
Table 2.2.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Western Digital ¤ ACELab

Family, (top-of-the-line Capacity, (top- Suffix Nomenclature Remark


model labeling) of-the-line model)
WD450AA 45,0 GB - xxBAyy 62-601003-zzz
WD307AA 30,7 GB - xxANyy Blank label
WD272AA 27,2 GB - xxAFyy Blank label
WD205AA 20,5 GB - xxAAyy 62-602234-zzz
where: xx - Customer ID
BA, AN, AF, AA – device number
yy - Customer Configuration Code - CCC
zzz – firmware version in a drive family
Thus in this architecture it is possible to identify a family by the number on ROM label, if present (it is the
most precise identification method) or by the model name suffix (in the MDL line on the label over the head-and-disk
assembly). In that case you should use the family number and Configuration Code in order to check for boards’
compatibility. Customer ID is irrelevant.

2.3. Identification of WD Arch-V, VI HDD families and newer models


Those family drives include: WD-Spartan, WD-Protégé and WD-Caviar, where a new construction was used
for the head-and-disk assembly (HDA). Just as with earlier Arch-V drive families (Table 2.2), identification has to be
performed using the MDL line on the HDA label (please see section 1 of this document). However, unlike the Arch-V
families, where boards within one family were compatible (provided that the versions of firmware stored in ROM were
compatible, too), in these drives ROM also contains the table of enabled heads. Thus electronics boards from similar
drive families and with identical firmware versions are incompatible if copied from HDDs with a different number of
heads. ROM has to be reprogrammed to adapt the electronics board if it is swapped to another drive.
In the Arch-V, VI and newer drive families one more designation – DCM- appeared on the HDA label; it
consists of 9 characters. That number (as we suggested) indicates the suppliers and components used for manufacture
of a drive. Some of those components are not interchangeable (e.g., the type of commutator pre-amplifier, used disks,
heads, etc.). Compatibility of HDAs and their components can be postulated only if 3 right characters in their DCM line
must match.
While designing the utilities for WD Arch-V, VI, we had to diverge from the regular approach of creating a
utility for each drive family because of the complexity of exact family identification. Instead, we subdivided the utilities
according to the architectural peculiarities and compatibility of the drives on the level of internal HDD tables, please
see Table 2.3.
Table 2.3
WD HDD model name Designation, MDL Testing utility Remark
WDxxxAB, for drive families <120 GB with
WDxxxBB, pcwd_abj.exe or LBA24 addressing
WD Caviar
WDxxxJB pcwd_cb2.exe1 for drive families >120 GB with
LBA48 addressing
WD Protege WDxxxEB pcwd_eb.exe
WD Spartan WDxxxDA pcwd_da.exe

3. Conclusion

Attention: A corresponding utility must be selected correctly for HDD testing. Otherwise you may irreversibly
damage the drive. If there is no individual utility for a specific model, such drive can be tested with universal
utilities of the complex only.
You can use the ac_ident.exe utility in order to identify the family of a drive (up to Arch-V). It will display the
drive family (which can be used for selection of a corresponding testing utility, please see Table 2.1), the number of
physical cylinders and heads in the drive.

1
The pcwd_cb2.exe offers a limited number of features.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V

"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

Contents
1. Purpose..........................................................................................................................................................................2
2. Basic options for the repair of WD Caviar Arch-V drives ...........................................................................................2
3. Preparing for work ........................................................................................................................................................2
4. Utility usage ..................................................................................................................................................................3
4.1. Standard mode .......................................................................................................................................................3
4.1.1. Servo test........................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1.2. Surface test........................................................................................................................................................ 3
4.1.3. Disc Firmware zone .......................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1.4. Drive description............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.5. Formatting......................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.6. Logical structure scanning ................................................................................................................................ 6
4.1.7. S.M.A.R.T. table ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.8. Defects table...................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.9. Automatic mode................................................................................................................................................ 7
4.2. SAFE MODE .........................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1. Alternative SAFE MODE ................................................................................................................................. 7
5. Brief technical description of WD450AA, WD307AA, WD272AA, and WD205AA drive families .........................8
5.1. The structure of HDD firmware.............................................................................................................................9
5.2. Compatibility between electronics boards .............................................................................................................9
5.3. The structure of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W) ....................................................................................10
5.3.1. Critical modules for drive data........................................................................................................................ 11
5.4. Modification of configuration..............................................................................................................................11
6. Software restoration of a drive....................................................................................................................................11
7. Restoration of firmware modules................................................................................................................................12
7.1. HDD translator recalculation ...............................................................................................................................13
8. Flash ROM recording .................................................................................................................................................13
8.1. Creation of an external loader file........................................................................................................................13

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

1. Purpose
The utilities are designed for restoration of 3" Caviar Arch-V drives manufactured by Western Digital, drive
families: WD450AA, WD307AA, WD272AA, WD205AA (please see Table1.1.). You can use the ac_ident.exe utility
for a more precise identification of models within drive families.
Table 1.1.
Utility Supported models – Capacity Number Heads MDL Family number1
(family) of disks

WDC WD450AA - 45.0 GB 3 6


“PC-450AA”
WDC WD300AA - 30.0 GB 2 4
(WD450AA)
WDC WD153AA - 15.3 GB 1 2 -xxBAyy 62-001003-xxx
Ver.1.15
WDC WD75AA - 7.5 GB 1 1
WDC WD307AA - 30.7 GB 3 6
“PC-307AA” WDC WD205AA - 20.5 GB 2 4
(WD4307AA) WDC WD153AA - 15.3 GB 2 3 -xxANyy Blank label
Ver.1.15 WDC WD136AA - 13.6 GB2 2 3
WDC WD102AA - 10.2 GB 1 2
WDC WD272AA - 27.2 GB 3 6
WDC WD205AA - 20.5 GB 3 5
“PC-272AA”
WDC WD172AA - 17.2 GB 2 4
(WD272AA)
WDC WD136AA - 13.6 GB 2 3 -xxAFyy Blank label
Ver.1.15
WDC WD84AA - 8.4 GB 1 2
WDC WD43AA - 4.3 GB 1 1
WDC AC205AA - 20.5 GB 3 6
“PC-205AA” WDC AC172AA - 17.2 GB 3 5
(WD205AA) WDC AC136AA - 13.6 GB 2 4 -xxAAyy 62-602234-xxx
Ver.1.15 WDC AC102AA - 10.2 GB 2 3
WDC AC64AA - 6.4 GB 1 2

2. Basic options for the repair of WD Caviar Arch-V drives


- testing and recovery of service information in a drive;
- correction of drive ID data in a HDD (logical parameters, serial number, model)
- restoration of low-level format;
- reviewing the tables of relocated defects;
- reviewing and resetting S.M.A.R.T. table in a drive;
- physical and logical surface scanning, and, based on the results, addition of the revealed defects to the
defects table;
- relocation of defective sectors;
- restoration of translator tables in a drive;
- automatic restoration of the drive.
The utilities function in tandem with the “Ɋɋ-3000PRO” tester board.

3. Preparing for work


1. Connect the PC-3000AT tester IDE cable to the IDE connector of the drive being tested.
2. Connect power cable to the drive. The utilities support operation with PC-3K PWR power supply adapter, if present;
in that case power is switched automatically depending upon the drive testing mode. If no power supply control adapter

1 - the number is printed on the ROM chip label; xxx – stands for the version of microprocessor firmware in this drive
family.
2 Reduced recording density.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

is present, the standard external PC power supply should be used with manual switching of power on/off according to
messages displayed on the screen.
3. Current directory must contain the utility executables (*.exe) and resource files (*.rsc).
4. Switch on the power supply to the drive being tested. If the PC-3K PWR adapter is present power supply is
controlled via PC keyboard (please see description for shell.com software command shell).
5. Start a respective utility using the shell.com command shell.
Attention! Utility tests have lots of options. It is recommended that novice users begin working with default test
options.

4. Utility usage
After utility start the following mode selection menu appears on the screen:
Standard mode
SAFE MODE
The standard mode is the regular mode of utility operation provided that the drive can be initialized.
SAFE MODE serves for working individually with the printed circuit board (PCB) containing the electronic
components without a head-and-disk assembly (HDA). The drive switches to SAFE MODE if three jumpers are enabled
together: CS, SLAVE and MASTER.

4.1. Standard mode

When the utility starts in the Standard mode it checks if the drive belongs to the corresponding drive family. In
case of a mismatch the following message appears: CONNECTED DRIVE NOT SUPPORTED BY THE UTILITY
with a subsequent offer of exit from the utility. If the utility corresponds to the type of the connected drive it lists the
drives which constitute the corresponding family. The cursor automatically moves to the name of the connected drive
model, but the choice can be changed if necessary. Pressing [Enter] will bring up the main menu of operation modes:
Servo test
Surface test
Disc Firmware zone
Drive description
Formatting
Logical structure scanning
S.M.A.R.T. table
Defects table
Automatic mode
Exit

4.1.1. Servo test

Servo test – testing is performed using physical parameters in ABA format (absolute block addressing). The test routine
does not differ in any way from that for the previous drive families; please see details in the description for WD Arch.4
“PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.

4.1.2. Surface test

Surface test allows to estimate the quality of magnetic surfaces, the state of magnetic-head assembly (MHA) and its
switch circuit, to detect and relocate all defective tracks and sectors. The test routine does not differ in any way from
that for the previous drive families, please see details in the description for WD Arch.4 “PC-A313000, PC-A310100,
PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.

4.1.3. Disc Firmware zone


Disc Firmware zone – allows to format and test the service area of a drive, to view and check the firmware structure, to
rewrite the firmware completely and reconfigure the drive. Selection of that mode will bring up the following menu:

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

Disc firmware zone


Translator operations
Spindle stop
Change time scale

4.1.3.1. Disc firmware zone


The command performs operations over the firmware zone of a drive: cyl: -6…-1, head: 0-1.
Disc Firmware surface test. The command starts the procedure for detecting defects located in the firmware
area of the drive (cyl: -6…-1, head: 0-1). The detected defects are displayed on the screen. No defects of cylinders -4
and -1 are allowed for normal functioning of the drive. The utility yet does not have the feature for relocation of defects
detected in firmware zone, but ongoing work continues for implementation of such functionality.
Disc Firmware structure test. This command brings on screen a list of firmware modules:
TRACKS DIRECTORY;
ZONE TABLE
CONFIGURATION SECTOR;
PLIST DEFECTS;
GLIST DEFECTS;
FIRMWARE MODULES.
When the command is executed, module search is performed with their checksum test. All the firmware data are located
on side 0 and duplicated on side 1. If the sectors containing a module cannot be read the following message will appear:
Read error. If a module has been read but checksum does not match, you will see the message: Checksum error. If the
checksum is correct, the following information will be displayed:
MODULE NAME
dd/mm/yy
Copy number Location Status
1 C:-1 H:0 OK
2 C:-1 H:1 OK
specific module parameters
where: dd/mm/yy mean the date, when the module was recorded.
For modules directory you will see a version number displayed, it is the disk firmware version.
After the list of main modules a list of FIRMWARE MODULES appears which looks as follows:
# ID Cyl Head Sec Length Date Ver Ch.ɋ. Status,
where: # is the module number;
ID - module identifier
Cyl, Head, Sec – module location;
Length – module length in sectors;
Date - the date, when the module was recorded
Ver – module version;
Ch.S. – checksum byte;
Status – testing result: OK, READ ERR, CHECK ERR.
Disc Firmware zone formatting. This command forces formatting of service area, cylinders –14…-1. This
procedure will destroy all the service data. After execution of the formatting command it is necessary to record the
firmware using the image recording method, see further.
Disc Firmware data read/write. The command accomplishes reading or recording of firmware data image
(tracks from -1 through -4) from (to) an *.rsc resource file. Running the command is identical to the same procedure for
the preceding drive families, please see the details for the Service data read/write command in the description for WD
Arch.4 “PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.
WARNING! Please note that the firmware zone in WdxxxAA drives occupies cylinders from ɫ -1 to -14, but the
utility saves just cylinders from -1 through -4, since we believe that it should be sufficient. That peculiarity saves
the space occupied by a resource file and the time required for reading. However, there may be certain HDD
modifications, for which not all of the firmware data will be read and recorded.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

Read modules - this operation allows reading of HDD firmware stored in the modules directory within the disk
service area. The read modules are placed then into the WD5_MOD subdirectory. The name of each read module file is
generated as follows.:
~idxx.rpm, where:
xx is the module identifier, e.g.: ~id20.rpm is the module of the 20h translator table.
Before the operation a list of modules available for reading appears on the screen, you will need to select either a
specific module in it or “ALL MODULES” item. In the latter case all the firmware modules will be read to the
WD5_MOD subdirectory. If the subdirectory already contains modules with the same names, repeated reading will
overwrite them without notification.
WARNING! Not all the modules present in the firmware area are indicated in the modules directory; instead it
contains just modules required for HDD operation. Thus, for example, several auxiliary modules - Selfscan,
Selfscan results, etc. may be not included into the modules directory. Therefore it is recommended to use
firmware image reading method in order to save the firmware completely (please see the paragraph on firmware
data read/write).
Write modules – this operation allows recording a firmware module (or modules) to the firmware zone of the
drive. Prior to the procedure you will see a list of all modules, which are available for writing in the WD5_MOD
subdirectory. The user has to select a certain module or the “ALL MODULES” option. In the latter case all the modules
from the WD5_MOD subdirectory will be written to the firmware zone. Module(s) checksum recalculation and
correction takes place before recording.
WARNING! The utility does not check the module structure before writing, therefore you should be extremely
attentive, otherwise you may irreversibly damage the drive.
Security subsystem1 menu option contains commands, which allow reviewing and resetting master and user
passwords in a hard drive.

4.1.3.2. Translator operations


Clear translator – this command accomplishes creation of a translator skipping the defects table, i.e. acts in
such a manner as though the drive has no relocated defects at all. Such a translator may be necessary to ensure correct
conversion of logical addresses (LBA) into physical (PCHS) or ABA to PCHS and to detect the location of defects.
That is why such a translator is created during surface scanning using physical parameters and during operations for
conversion of ABA to PCHS. The operation is identical to the command Translator recalculation without P- and G-
List.
ABA to PCHS translation – such conversion is useful, when you have to relocate a damaged sector on the disk
surface, but attempts to test it fail. The drive either hangs on that sector or starts knocking, etc. In that case you have to
“pin down” the defective zone as precisely as possible and define the zone in ABA. Then use the conversion to identify
the tracks bordering on the defective zone and add the tracks surrounding the damaged area to the table of defects. In
order to do so you will have to use the option: Add physical track (please see the section about work with the defects
table).
Regenerate Translator– accomplishes recalculation of a drive’s translator, modules 20h and 25h, based on the
defects tables of P- and (or) G-List. The need for recalculation appears, when the 20h and (or) 25h modules in the
firmware zone get corrupted, please see details in section 7.

4.1.3.3. Spindle stop


The option sends a SLEEP command; it is used for HOT-SWAP operations.

4.1.3.4. Change time scale


When the utility reaches a timeout it terminates the current command and displays a message informing the
user that the HDD has not reported on readiness within 15 sec. However, some HDD models may require a lot of time
to report on readiness, especially those with corrupted modules in firmware zone – 3 and more minutes. Use the
Change Time scale feature to increase the 15-second wait period by entering the corresponding factor (1 - 15 sec, 2 - 30
sec, etc.).

1 That command is used in the WD450AA drive family only.


Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 5
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

4.1.4. Drive description

Drive description - – brings the drive’s disk description on the screen. All non-displayable ASCII characters are
replaced with spaces. Drive’s description: logical structure parameters and serial number can be corrected. When it is
necessary to correct model name you should first set MODEL FROM ROM parameter to NO by pressing [Space].
Press [Enter] to enter the parameter or to move to editing the next one; press [Esc] if you do not want to rewrite the
drive description area.

4.1.5. Formatting

Formatting – starts the low-level formatting procedure. During formatting the drive skips defective sectors and
defective tracks reading their numbers from the defects table (if the method using one or another table has been
selected). The formatting procedure cannot be interrupted because when it finishes a translator recalculation and
recording are performed. If format ends in error it means presence of corrupt servo information or incorrectly compiled
defects table. Even if formatting ends in error, the translator is recalculated and recorded, though not all the surface of
the drive will be formatted. Before the start of formatting you have to select the defects table mode or formatting
without defects table data. Formatting takes approximately 40 minutes, but it depends on the model, condition of
magnetic disks and can grow considerably with defective surfaces.

4.1.6. Logical structure scanning


Logical structure scanning – starts the defects detection procedure utilizing logical parameters in LBA. The test routine
does not differ in any way from that for the previous drive families, please see details in the description for WD Arch.4
“PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.

4.1.7. S.M.A.R.T. table

S.M.A.R.T. table – allows viewing S.M.A.R.T. parameters of a drive. You can read in detail about S.M.A.R.T. in the
PC-3000AT tester description.

4.1.8. Defects table

Defects table – allows to view, add, clear defects table or perform defects grouping:
View defects table. This command displays the table of relocated defects in a drive. Viewing defects’ tables
helps estimate the quality and status of the magnetic disks used in the drive.
Add LBA defect. This command adds a logical defect in LBA notation. After addition all entered logical
structure defects are translated into physical location and placed into the defects table P-List or G-List at operator’s
option. Formatting is required after adding defects to the table.
Add physical track. Allows to enter physical defective tracks manually.
Import logical defects table. This command allows to add values from a *.dft file to the defects table (P or G-
List at your option). Such a file may be prepared, for instance, by Defectoscope 2.10 software or any other program.
The *.dft file structure is described in the appendix for the Defectoscope utility. After adding the defects formatting
must be performed.
Clear defects table. After execution of that command the respective defects table will be reset – the number of
defective sectors become equal to 0. The user has to select which table should be cleared.
Move G-List to P-List. This command adds the contents of G-List table to the contents of P-List table; G-List
is reset during this procedure. This mode does not influence the drive operation in any way but it allows to increase the
S.M.A.R.T. parameter Relocated Sector Count.
Group to tracks. This menu item allows to group into defective tracks those defective sectors, which already
are entered into the tables of defects. When you enter the mode you will see the message: LIMIT OF GROUPING
INTO TRACKS. Then you have to enter the limit value above which sector defects should be grouped into defective
tracks in both P-List and G-List tables. The input range is from 1 to 50.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
6 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

4.1.9. Automatic mode

Automatic mode allows scanning the drive automatically without operator intervention. When this mode is selected two
lists appear on the screen: TASKS LIST and AVAILABLE TASKS. Before testing starts a test program must be
created or a previously created one loaded.
Attention! The work in the automatic mode does not differ in any way from that for the previous drive families,
please see details in the description for WD Arch.4 “PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.
Exit – exits from the utility.

4.2. SAFE MODE

The mode provides access to a limited number of drive features. The safe mode is meant for testing the printed circuit
boards (PCB) separately from the HDA. However, after switching a drive into safe mode you may leave a PCB on its
HDA. In order to enable the safe mode you should set three jumpers at once: CS, SLAVE, MASTER and switch on the
power. The drive at that does not process bits D6 (DRDY) and D4 (DSC) in the status register. The following menu
appears after selection of that mode:
Work with ROM
PCB testing
Work with ROM menu option allows access to recording, reading and viewing of a drive’s ROM:
Viewing ROM information command displays on-screen firmware version, the version of the links’ table and a
list of modules supported in that drive family:
Copyright 1996-99
ROM version : WDC 05.09 B
ROM revision : 1F
Links table version: 05.56
Supported models
WDC WD51AA
WDC WD102AA
WDC WD153AA
WDC WD205AA
WDC WD255AA
WDC WD307AA
Reading ROM command accomplishes reading of ROM contents to a file with *.bin extension. If you select
that operation you should enter the file name without an extension. The read-in file will be placed in the current
PC3000 subdirectory.
Writing ROM1 command accomplishes recording of drive ROM from a file. During the procedure you should
first select the wd_aa.lmc loader file (or compatible), then select a *.bin file to be recorded, it has to be in the PC3000
subdirectory. When the file is selected, the actual recording process begins. The method of recording ROM is described
in more detail in section 8.
PCB test command allows checking several components of a drive’s electronics board, namely, it can sector
buffer test and initiate internal self diagnostic. Please see details of those modes in the description to the PC-3000AT
tester.

4.2.1. Alternative SAFE MODE

The WD3xxxAA drive family has one more mechanism for switching a drive into Safe Mode, i.e. by default.
If you remove the PCB from its HDA without installed jumpers and leave it for 3 minutes with power on, then the
board will report on readiness when that period expires. If you launch after that the universal PC-3000AT utility, the
board will be identified as the top-of-the-line model in the family. That will enable you to check the board electronics
by testing the sector buffer and running the drive’s self-testing routine, those tests are available in the controller testing
mode of the PC-3000AT tester. You can also view drive ID in that mode. It is helpful, when you do not know exactly

1 ɗɬɚ ɨɩɟɪɚɰɢɹ ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɚ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɜ ɧɚɤɨɩɢɬɟɥɹɯ, ɜ ɤɨɬɨɪɵɯ ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɭɟɬɫɹ Flash ROM.


Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 7
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

the family, to which a PCB belongs. By reviewing the drive ID description you can identify the family and ROM
firmware version.

5. Brief technical description of WD450AA, WD307AA, WD272AA, and


WD205AA drive families
Electronics boards of WD405AA and WD205AA drive families are shown in Pic. 5.1.1. and Pic. 5.1.2. respectively.

1
M27C1024-
35C1 CL-SH3367-
WD70C12 62-001003 DH-B3
-065

4
WDC © 1999

MASTER
SLAVE 1. 25.00 MHz
CS 2. US1010-3,3
1
3. L6262 2.6
2
3 4. 78M08A

Configuration Standart Settings


Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS

CS

CS
SLAVE

SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS

Pic. 5.1.1. External view of the electronics board in WD405AA drive family.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
8 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

1
WDC99
62-602234 CL-SH3367-
-080 HC -B2
WD70C10-SW

4
WDC © 1999

MASTER
SLAVE 1. 25.00 MHz
CS 2. US1010-3,3
1
3. L6262 2.6
2 4. 78M08A
3

Configuration Standart Settings


Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS

CS

CS
SLAVE

SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS
Pic. 5.1.2. External view of the electronics board in WD205AA drive family.

5.1. The structure of HDD firmware

Firmware of WD HDDs consists of a microprogram stored in ROM, a configuring links table also located in
ROM, a loadable firmware portion and data in the service area of a drive (DISK Firmware). The firmware is
characterized by its revision number (F/W Rev.), which defines its development and compatibility.
Firmware part Version, example Location
Microprogram 82.18A ROM
Links table 10.07 ROM
Loadable firmware version, tables 82.18A Firmware zone, (cylinders -1 to -14)
You can find out the microcode version and the version of ROM links table using the Viewing ROM information
command in Safe Mode. The version of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W) can be displayed by running the Disc
Firmware structure test menu item in the basic utility mode. The version indicated in the modules’ directory will be the
version for DISK F/W.
Version number output by the drive in the “firmware version" line after the Identify DRV (ECh) command, i.e.
when the drive ID is viewed, is an aggregative value and contains the information from all three parts of HDD
firmware, e.g.:
ROM firmware: 82.18A
ROM links table: 10.07
DISK F/W: 16.14A
As a result the compiled version of HDD firmware will look like: 82.10A16. As it can be seen in this example, the
version number was formed using the first bytes from the respective versions of the parts of HDD firmware. The letter
is borrowed from the version of ROM microcode. If you read microprogram version in Safe Mode, the DISK F/W part
of the version will be missing, because all operations with disk firmware portion are disabled in that mode.

5.2. Compatibility between electronics boards

As with previous WD drive families the manufacturer indicates the firmware recorded to a 27ɋ1024 ROM
chip with a special label bearing version number according to internal factory classification:
62-xxxxxx-yyy, where:
62 – indicates that the device belongs to HDD storage type;
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 9
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

xxxxxx – family number (it may have different values even within one family);
yyy – firmware version number in that family.
Thus, for example, for a WD64AA drive (WD205AA family) firmware version is 62-602234-080, while for a
WD153AA drive (WD450AA family) firmware version will be 62-001003-065. Such classification is very convenient
and allows error-free selection of replacement boards – if the ROM numbers match it means that the boards are
completely interchangeable.
However, in WD272AA and WD307AA drive families the manufacturer started using Flash ROM with a
circular label on the chip, but it does not bear any numbers, therefore firmware version can be identified only after
reading ROM contents or by running the Viewing ROM information command in Safe Mode.

5.3. The structure of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W)

WD drives have 14 service cylinders (from –14 through –1) used for storage of firmware recorded in two
copies over sides 0 and 1. However only first 4 cylinders (-1 through -4) are actually used for recording of the firmware
modules. Firmware data are stored in the form of individual modules, which form together HDD control and operating
system. Navigation between the modules is performed in accordance with the modules’ directory containing the address
of each module, its identifier and length. Each module, in its turn, has a standard header containing its date, checksum,
identifier, version number and module length expressed in sectors. Please see the main DISK F/W modules in the
summary table below.

Table 5.3.1 Functional purpose of modules


Module Purpose
ID, hex
01 Loadable portion of firmware code
02 Loadable portion of firmware code
10 Loadable portion of firmware code
11 Loadable portion of firmware code
12 Loadable portion of firmware code
14 Loadable portion of firmware code
20 Translator
21 Loadable portion of firmware code
22 Loadable portion of firmware code
23 Loadable portion of firmware code
25 Loadable portion of firmware code
29 Module containing SMART parameters
2A SMART log
2B SMART log
2C SMART log
2D Module containing SMART parameters
2E Initial table of SMART parameters, it is not used during drive operation and serves as a model
36 Loadable portion of firmware code
41 (~dir) Modules directory (the table of modules location within firmware zone)
42 Configuration table (HDD ID)
43 P-LIST defects table
44 G-LIST defects table
46 ? Adaptive parameters
48 ? Adaptive parameters
49 ? Adaptive parameters
4A ? Reserved
4C ? Reserved
4D ? Reserved
Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
10 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

4E ? Reserved
61 Loadable portion of firmware code, the part which performs overwriting of Flash ROM
FF Selfscan module

5.3.1. Critical modules for drive data


The translator modules (20h – 25h) and modules containing adaptive parameters (46h – 49h) are traditionally
essential for data integrity in drives belonging to WdxxxAA families, there may be other important modules, but we
haven’t identified any so far. If the translator modules become corrupted you can perform their recalculation based on
the P and (or) G-List defects tables and overwrite them. The procedure is performed by the Regenerate Translator
command.

5.4. Modification of configuration

At power-up a drive configures itself as a specific model of its family during initialization. The FLT/SE signal
produced by the commutator pre-amplifier chip is used for that purpose. After spin-up of the spindle motor the drive
microprocessor sequentially checks all heads beginning with the zero one. When a missing head is detected, the
FLT/SE signal is sent to the microprocessor. Thus the drive determines precisely the number of heads and configures
itself as a corresponding model. The signal for heads’ switching is sent by the microprocessor in a serial code.
Developers of the utility have not yet discovered a method for software isolation of defective surfaces; so there
is just one way to decrease the capacity of a drive – i.e. disabling the disk sides “from the top”. In order to disable a
malfunctioning side you’ll have to open the HDA and disconnect the conductors from the magneto-resistive heads of
the defective sides and all sides above the ones being disabled. Keep in mind the location of magnetic surfaces during
that procedure.

6. Software restoration of a drive

Depending upon the state of the drive being repaired, certain operations might be necessary for its restoration.
For example, if at power-up a drive does not spin up the spindle motor or spins it up and stops, then such a defect most
likely has to deal with the electronics board and requires its repair. If a drive starts to spin up the spindle motor and
monotonously knocks with its positioner against locking plate instead of recalibration, then such a defect demonstrates
malfunctions of the drive’s servo system and can be caused by one of the following:
- electronic controller board and the sealed HDA belong to different drive families and are incompatible;
- malfunction of commutator pre-amplifier chip of the Head Assembly (HA) inside the HDA;
- malfunction of the HA itself;
- seriously corrupt servo data or a shift of magnetic disks pack after a shock (increased noise of spindle motor
rotation usually and case vibration show that the drive has been hit).
In all of the above cases except for the first one software restoration of the drive is impossible.

If after switching power on the drive spins up the spindle motor and unparks the magnetic heads, but while entering the
PC-3000AT program generates the ABRT (04h) error, or errors appear one after another while reading drive surfaces,
then it means that the drive can’t read firmware data from the disk. That kind of defect may arise from:
- data reading/translation channel malfunction;
- servo modules corruption;
- incompatibility between the disk firmware version and the firmware code recorded in the control board
ROM.
In such case ensure that the control board is functional (the best method is swapping of the boards), the ROM and HDA
versions are compatible, and begin the hardware data restoration from step 1.
If after switching power on the drive initializes, recalibrates, and its drive ID is read, but testing reveals BAD sectors,
then the restoration should be started from step 2.

1. Restore firmware data (F/W). The F/W restoration procedure is as follows:

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 11
Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA" ¤ ACELab

a). Perform the command “DISC FIRMWARE STRUCTURE TEST” and identify corrupted modules. If just
some modules are damaged while others remain normal, you can overwrite the defective modules using the
method described in section 7.
b). If the majority of modules are corrupted in a drive select the “DISC FIRMWARE ZONE” menu option and
run the “DISC FIRMWARE SURFACE TEST” command. Make sure that there are no errors on cylinders: -5 ..
-1, heads: 0-1. If errors occur, perform DISC FIRMWARE ZONE FORMATTING;
c). Select the menu items: “DISC FIRMWARE DATA READ/WRITE”, “WRITE FW TO THE DISC” and write
the data to the drive being restored according to the version of the drive processor microcode. After successful
recording the firmware is restarted;
d). Correct the logical parameters, if necessary.
2. Clear PLIST and GLIST defects tables and reset SMART.
3. Run SERVO TEST. Ensure that the CLEAR TRANSLATOR option is enabled. During testing a block-by-block surface
formatting is performed, the testing procedure measures the time of decoding for all the servo fields in the current block
and the obtained value is shown on a respective diagram.
When the test is complete the table containing the number of the defective sectors in ABA notation appears on
the screen. Pressing the [Enter] key converts all block numbers in ABA notation into physical PCHS notation and
displays a table of defective tracks. Pressing [Enter] appends all defective tracks to P-List.
4. Run SURFACE TEST. The test is performed using physical parameters in ABA format. It is allowed to switch off
writing and perform verification instead of reading to make the test run faster. After testing procedure a table
containing defective ABA numbers appears on the screen. Pressing [Enter] converts all the ABA-represented blocks
into physical PCHS notation and a table with defective sectors and tracks appears on the screen. Pressing [Enter]
appends all defective sectors and tracks to P-List.
5. Using the results of tests 3 and 4 make a conclusion concerning the necessity of defective surfaces isolation (see
section 5.4.). After turning off defective sides it is necessary to continue the drive restoration beginning with step 2.
6. Perform low-level formatting using PLIST, which should complete successfully. If formatting ended in an error, you
have to repeat steps 3, and 4 or, if the drive was reconfigured, correct its logical parameters (cyl, head, sec) in
accordance with the new model parameters.
7. Perform LOGICAL STRUCTURE SCANNING procedure, which is executed in LBA format. After completion of
surface scanning procedure a table of all detected logical defects in LBA notation will be output on the screen. Pressing
[Enter] converts all logical defects into physical addresses and adds them to the P-LIST or G-LIST defects table at
user’s option.
8. Perform low-level format using P and G-List.
9. Write serial number into the drive ID area, if necessary.
10. Perform COMPLEX TEST with the PC-3000AT tester. If errors are detected repeat steps 3-6 or run the
UNIVERSAL DEFECTS RELOCATION procedure.
11. Run the PC-3000AT tester COMPLEX TEST and make sure that the drive is functional.

7. Restoration of firmware modules


A defect of firmware data modules is a frequently occurring fault. The malfunction manifests itself as follows:
the drive spins up the spindle motor, remains unable to report on readiness for a very long time (more than a minute),
then it reports on readiness but responds to any command with the ABRT error.
Diagnostics of such malfunction requires to select the "DISC FIRMWARE STRUCTURE TEST" command in
the "DISC FIRMWARE ZONE / DISC FIRMWARE ZONE" menu, and to inspect which modules are defective in the
"FIRMWARE MODULES" table. You can also do it in a different manner. Select the " READ MODULES " mode
from the "DISC FIRMWARE ZONE" menu and read all the modules from the drive. Then it is necessary to exit the
utility and view lengths of the copied modules. If the length of some modules is equal to 0, then consequently these
modules are defective, and it is necessary to re-write them. Modules 20h, 21h, 25h (translator), 2Ah, 2Dh (SMART),
etc. suffer from corruption most frequently.
Overwriting the modules requires using the Disc firmware data read/write command from the Disc firmware
zone menu. The procedure requires first reading all modules from a drive; they are subsequently added to the
WD5_MOD directory. Then you should replace the damaged modules in that directory with normal ones copied from
an operational compatible drive and record the modules to the HDD.
Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
12 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Caviar" Arch-V
¤ ACELab "PC-A450AA" "PC-A307AA" "PC-A272AA" "PC-A205AA"

Some of the modules are critical for data protection and should not be overwritten if you wish to preserve the
user's data, for example, the 20h - 25h translator modules, 46h - 49h modules containing adaptive parameters.
Other modules are not so essential and they can be overwritten, however, it’s better to copy normal modules from the
same HDD model with an identical firmware version.
Anyway, prior to starting the drive restoration it is necessary to save all the modules and the ROM
firmware to have an opportunity to reverse the changes.

7.1. HDD translator recalculation

Translator restoration can be invoked as follows: Disc Firmware zone, Translator operations, Regenerate
Translator. Upon entering the mode you will be offered to select the basic tables to be used for the recalculation:
Take into account PLIST and G-LIST
Take into account Use PLIST
Take into account Use G-LIST
Do not take into account neither PLIST nor G-LIST
Factory testing of a drive appends defects to the P-List table (primary) only; the G-List (Grown) table remains empty. It
is filled in the process of drive operation by the device itself in the Data Lifeguard and Assign modes. Thus, translator
of a drive arriving from a factory is recalculated using P-List only. Therefore if you restore a drive with corrupted 20h
and 25h modules, the procedure should be performed using P-List only, in that case access to user data will be restored.

8. Flash ROM recording1


Some models in the WDxxxAA drive families contain Flash ROM, which can be overwritten in Safe Mode. It
is just overwriting, which is possible, because Safe Mode is a software mode of the control firmware stored in ROM. If
a portion of ROM gets corrupted or erased, overwriting of the chip contents on board becomes impossible. Therefore
you will have to unsolder the chip and program it using a ROM programmer (e.g., PC-PROG).
In order to enable recording to ROM you have to switch the drive to Safe Mode by setting three jumpers
together: CS, SLAVE, MASTER and turning the power on. Then select the mode: Safe Mode, Work with ROM, Writing
ROM, the following menu will be displayed:
Select an *.lmc loader file
The loader is nothing else than module ID=61h renamed to wd_aa.lmc. It contains the subroutines for work with ROM
(type identification, erasure and recording). A situation is possible, when the manufacturer changes the type of Flash
ROM on drive PCB so that the wd_aa.lmc loader would not support that type, then ROM will not be overwritten. In
such case you can copy module 61h from a WDxxxAA drive supporting that Flash ROM type, rename it to *.lmc and
attempt to overwrite the ROM contents again. After loader selection you will have to select a binary *.bin file
containing the ROM firmware. The loader file and firmware ROM file should be located in the current PC-3000
directory.
After recording it is necessary to read the ROM and compare the files.

8.1. Creation of an external loader file

In order to produce an external loader file copy the ~id61.rpm module from an operational drive with a Flash ROM
chip of the required type. Rename the file so that it receives the Loader Micro Code (lmc) extension.

1 Flash ROM chips are marked: 28xxx, 29xxx, 49xxx. 27xxx chips do not belong to Flash type.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 13
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar"

Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI

"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

Contents

1. Purpose..........................................................................................................................................................................2
2. Basic options for the repair of WD Arch-V drives .......................................................................................................2
3. Preparing for work ........................................................................................................................................................3
4. Utility usage ..................................................................................................................................................................3
4.1. Standard mode .......................................................................................................................................................3
4.1.1. Disc Firmware zone .......................................................................................................................................... 3
4.1.2. Drive description............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.3. Formatting......................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.4. Logical structure scanning ................................................................................................................................ 6
4.1.5. S.M.A.R.T. table ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1.6. Defects table...................................................................................................................................................... 7
4.1.7. Automatic mode................................................................................................................................................ 7
4.2. SAFE MODE .........................................................................................................................................................7
5. Brief technical description of Spartan, Caviar, Protege Arch-V, and Caviar Arch VI drive families. .........................8
5.1. The structure of HDD firmware...........................................................................................................................10
5.2. Compatibility between electronics boards ...........................................................................................................10
5.2.1. HA compatibility (knocking sounds at power-up).......................................................................................... 11
5.3. The structure of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W) ....................................................................................11
5.3.1. Critical modules for drive data........................................................................................................................ 13
5.4. Data structure in Flash ROM in WD Caviar and Protege drive families .............................................................13
5.5. Modification of drive configuration, software heads deactivation ......................................................................13
6. Software restoration of a drive....................................................................................................................................14
7. Restoration of firmware modules................................................................................................................................15
7.1. HDD translator recalculation ...............................................................................................................................15
8. Flash ROM recording .................................................................................................................................................16
8.1. Creation of an external loader file........................................................................................................................16
9. Electric circuit.............................................................................................................................................................16
9.1. Reference voltage sources....................................................................................................................................16
9.2. Control circuit of spindle motor and positioner ...................................................................................................17
9.3. Data reading channel............................................................................................................................................17

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

1. Purpose
The utilities are designed for restoration of 3" Spartan, Caviar, Protege Arch-V and Caviar Arch VI drives
manufactured by Western Digital, drive families: WDxxxDA, WDxxxAB, WDxxxBB, WDxxxEB, and WDxxxJB
(please see Table 1.1.).
Table 1.1.
Utility Arch. Supported models – Number Heads Speed, Utility
(family) capacity of disks RPM
WD2000BB/JB - 200 GB 3 6
WDxxxBB/JB, Caviar
WD1800BB/JB - 180 GB 3 6
(WD2000BB series) VI 7200 pcwd_cb2.exe1
WD1600BB/JB - 160 GB 3 6
WD1200BB/JB - 120 GB 2 4
WD800BB/JB - 80 GB 1 2
WDxxxBB/JB, Caviar
V WD600BB/JB - 60 GB 1 2 7200 pcwd_abj.exe
(WD800BB series)
WD400BB/JB - 40 GB 1 1
WD1200BB/JB - 120 GB 3 6
WD1000BB/JB - 100 GB 3 5
WDxxxBB, Caviar
WD800BB - 80 GB 2 4
(WD1200BB series) V 7200 pcwd_abj.exe
WD600BB - 60 GB 2 3
WD400BB - 40 GB 1 2
WD200BB - 20 GB 1 1
WD400BB - 40 GB 1 2
WDxxxBB, Caviar
V WD300BB - 30 GB 1 2 7200 pcwd_abj.exe
(WD400BB series)
WD200BB - 20 GB 1 1
WD400EB - 40 GB 1 2
WDxxxEB, Protégé
V WD300EB - 30 GB 1 2 5400 pcwd_eb.exe
(WD400EB series)
WD200EB - 20 GB 1 1
WD1200AB - 120 GB 3 6
WD1000AB - 100 GB 3 5
WDxxxAB, Caviar
WD800AB - 80 GB 2 4
(WD1200AB series) V 5400 pcwd_abj.exe
WD600AB - 60 GB 2 3
WD400AB - 40 GB 1 2
WD200AB - 20 GB 1 1
WD153DA - 15.3 GB 1 2
WDxxxDA, Spartan V 4500 pcwd_da.exe
WD75DA - 7.5 GB 1 1

2. Basic options for the repair of WD Arch-V drives


- testing and recovery of firmware data in a drive;
- correction of drive ID data in a HDD (logical parameters, serial number, model);
- restoration of low-level format;
- reviewing the tables of relocated defects;
- reviewing and resetting S.M.A.R.T. table in a drive;
- physical and logical surface scanning, and, based on the results, addition of the revealed defects to the
defects table;
- relocation of defective sectors;
- drive reconfiguration (software disabling of malfunctioning heads);
- restoration of translator tables in a drive;
- automatic restoration of the drive.
The utilities function in tandem with the “Ɋɋ-3000PRO” tester board.

1 The utility has limited functionality.


Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

3. Preparing for work


1. Connect the PC-3000PRO tester IDE cable to the IDE connector of the drive being tested.
2. Connect power cable to the drive. The utilities support operation with PC-3K PWR power supply adapter, if
present; in that case power is switched automatically depending upon the drive testing mode. If no power supply
control adapter is present, the standard external PC power supply should be used with manual switching of power
on/off according to messages displayed on the screen.
3. Current directory must contain the utility executables (*.exe) and resource files (*.rsc).
4. Switch on the power supply to the drive being tested. If the PC-3K PWR adapter is present power supply is
controlled via PC keyboard (please see description for shell.com software command shell).
5. Start a respective utility using the shell.com command shell.
ATTENTION! Utility tests have lots of options. It is recommended that novice users begin working with default
test options.

4. Utility usage
After utility start the following mode selection menu appears on the screen:
Standard mode
SAFE MODE
The Standard mode is the regular mode of utility operation provided that the drive can be initialized.
SAFE MODE serves for working individually with the printed circuit board (PCB) containing the electronic
components without a head-and-disk assembly (HDA). The drive switches to SAFE MODE if three jumpers are enabled
together: CS, SLAVE and MASTER.

4.1. Standard mode

In the Standard mode the utility does not check the family of the connected drive during launch (unlike earlier
versions of utilities for WD drives). Instead it displays an entry menu: Spartan, Protege or Caviar (depending upon the
launched utility). Users have to check personally the model of the connected drive. Pressing [Enter] will force reading
of the configuration modules and bring up the main menu of operation modes:
Disc Firmware zone
Drive description
Formatting
Logical structure scanning
S.M.A.R.T. table
Defects table
Automatic mode
Exit

4.1.1. Disc Firmware zone

Firmware zone – allows to format and test the service area of a drive, to view and check the firmware structure, to
rewrite the firmware completely and reconfigure the drive. Selection of that mode will bring up the following menu:

Work with ROM


Disc firmware zone
Translator operations
Spindle stop
Change time scale

4.1.1.1. Work with ROM


The menu option accomplishes writing, reading and the drive’s ROM viewing operations. That mode also allows
software disabling/enabling of magnetic heads.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

Viewing ROM information command displays on-screen firmware version, ROM revision (which might serve
as a family code), the version of the links’ table and a list of supported models together with information about heads
mapping:
Copyright 2001 WDC
ROM version : 06.40 G
ROM revision : 33
Links table version : 04.27
Supported models
WDC WD200BB
WDC WD400BB
WDC WD600BB
WDC WD800BB
WDC WD1000BB
WDC WD1200BB
Heads assignment data
Heads assignment : default
The data is valuable for estimation of compatibility between different ROM versions during selection of PCBs for
replacement.
Changing heads map in ROM1 command accomplishes software disabling or enabling of previously disabled
drive heads. When that mode is selected the cursor is positioned over the current variant of heads assignment: by
mapping or default, the variants are switched by pressing the [Space] key.
Selection of By default heads assignment means that HDD heads mapping will be formed according to the
results received after physical polling of the heads connected to pre-amplifier/commutator during the initialization
stage. Selection of assignment by mapping allows disabling of the internal map used for physical heads polling. In such
case a drive will not rely on the data about physically connected heads using instead the heads mapping data in ROM.
Then you must indicate the Full heads amount – i.e. the value of their maximum number allowed for that drive
family (usually 6). Then you can proceed and disable or enable drive heads using [Space]; pressing [Enter] will shift
the highlighted rectangle to the next head. After completion of the current operation you will see an offer to record thus
generated ROM to a file or write the modified heads mapping directly to the drive’s Flash ROM. Please see details
about the mechanism of ROM recording in the paragraph devoted to the Write ROM command.
If you define the flag “by mapping” for a HDD, which used By default heads mapping before that, then the
Full heads amount and Active heads values will equal 0, all heads become configured as disabled. In that case you
should set the value “Full heads amount” = 6 (as the maximum allowed in the drive family) and enable the suggested
heads, e.g. 0 and 1 for a model with 2 heads. If the drive starts knocking after that, it means that the heads have been
enabled incorrectly and you should attempt to select two other heads, e.g. 1 and 2, in Safe Mode.
Read ROM command accomplishes reading of ROM contents to a file with *.bin extension. If you select that
operation you should enter the file name without an extension. The read-in file will be placed in the current PC3000
subdirectory.
Write ROM2 command accomplishes recording of drive ROM from a file. During the procedure you should
first select the loader - module 61h or an external *.lmc module, then select a *.bin file to be recorded (it has to be in
the PC3000 subdirectory). When the file is selected, the actual recording process begins. The method of recording
ROM is described in more detail in section 8.

4.1.1.2. Disc firmware zone


The command performs operations over the firmware zone of a drive: cyl: -10...-1, head: 0-1.
Disc Firmware surface test. The command starts the procedure for detecting defects located in the firmware
area of the drive (cyl: -10…-1, head: 0-1). The detected defects are displayed on the screen. No defects of that area are
allowed for normal functioning of the drive. The utility yet does not have the feature for relocation of defects detected
in firmware zone, but ongoing work continues for implementation of such functionality.
Disc Firmware structure test. This command displays on-screen a list of firmware modules. It is similar to the
previous WD drive families (please see description in PC-3000 - Western Digital "Caviar" Arch. V, Arch. IV, etc.). We
shall mention just new peculiarities of that command:

1 That mode is unavailable for the WD Spartan drive family.


2 The operation is possible only for drives where Flash ROM is used.
Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

First of all, the utility lists the modules’ directory with a version actually representing the version of HDD
firmware portion recorded on disk surface (Disk F/W). Two new data tables have been also added into the report: DCM
Info and VER Info1. In fact they are logs containing certain ASCII information output by the utility. The DCM Info
table is stored in module ɋ5h, table VER Info is stored in module 4Eh:
DCM Info – the purpose of that table is not quite clear yet; it is likely to be useful in future during selection of
matching “donor" drives for replacement of heads assembly (HA) for data recovery. Please see details in section 5.2.1
VER Info table contains the versions of ROM, links table, and Disk F/W. That information is useful for
selection of matching PCB.
ATTENTION! The information in DCM Info and VER Info in the ɋ5h and 4Eh modules is optional; it is
generated in logs. Therefore absence of data or garbage in those tables does not indicate a drive’s malfunction.
Disc Firmware data read/write. The command accomplishes reading or recording of firmware data image
(tracks from -1 through -8 excluding track -7) from (to) an *.rsc resource file. The utility reads the number of sectors in
the firmware zone from the zone allocation table. If the table cannot be read, the operator will have to enter manually
the number of sectors per track for the firmware zone of that HDD model at utility launch.
Running the command is identical to the same procedure for the preceding drive families; please see the details
for the Disc Firmware data read/write command in the description for WD Arch.4 “PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-
A38400, PC-A36400”.
WARNING! Please note that the firmware zone occupies cylinders from -1 to -32, but the utility saves just
cylinders from -1 through -8 (except for cyl. -7), since we believe that it should be sufficient. That peculiarity
saves the space occupied by a resource file and the time required for reading. However, there may be certain
HDD modifications, for which not all of the firmware data will be read and recorded.
Read modules - this operation allows reading of HDD firmware stored in the modules directory within the disk
service area. The read modules are placed then into the WDxxxMOD subdirectory, where xxx:
DA_ - for WD Spartan
EB_ - for WD Protégé
ABJ - for WD Caviar
The name of each read module file is generated as follows: ~idxx.rpm, where:
xx the module identifier, e.g.: ~id20.rpm is the module of the 20h translator table.
Before the operation a list of modules available for reading appears on the screen, you will need to select either a
specific module in it or “ALL MODULES” item. In the latter case all the firmware modules will be read to the
WDxxxMOD subdirectory. If the subdirectory already contains modules with the same names, repeated reading will
overwrite them without notification.
WARNING! Not all the modules present in the firmware area are indicated in the modules directory; instead it
contains just modules required for HDD operation. Thus, for example, several auxiliary modules - Selfscan,
Selfscan results, etc. may be not included into the modules directory. Therefore it is recommended to use
firmware image reading method in order to save the firmware completely (please see the paragraph on firmware
data reading/writing).
Write modules – this operation allows recording of a firmware module (or modules) to the service area of the
drive. Prior to the procedure you will see a list of all modules in the WDɯɯɯMOD subdirectory available for writing.
The user has to select a certain module or the “ALL MODULES” option. In the latter case all the modules from the
WDɯɯɯMOD subdirectory will be written to the firmware zone. Module(s) checksum recalculation and correction takes
place before recording.
WARNING! The utility does not check the module structure before writing, therefore you should be extremely
attentive, otherwise you may irreversibly damage the drive.
Erase firmware area command fills all sectors in the service area with code 7777h using heads 0 and 1. All
information in that zone will be deleted. Before the operation you should enter the initial and ending cylinders, default
values are read from the zone allocation table (-32 .. -1).
The need for that operation arises when service area contains “garbage” preventing normal drive operation.

WARNING! All information within the firmware zone will be erased during area clearing. Therefore you should
save firmware data as modules and firmware zone image prior to the operation.

1 DCM Info and VER Info tables are missing in the WD Spartan drive family.
Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 5
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

Change servo area SPT command helps define the number of sectors per track for operations with service area
(from cyl. -32 through cyl. -1). The default value is read from the zone allocation table, the allowed maximum is limited
by the default 1361 cyl. value.
The SPT value has to be modified in cases when the command for reading zone allocation data returns invalid
information (negative values, garbage or error). In such cases you have to explicitly provide to the utility the number of
sectors per tract to use. The number of sectors in firmware zone can be identified by running the Disc Firmware surface
test. Sector numbers in that test grow sequentially beginning with 1. The maximum cylinder number will be the one
producing constant errors on all cylinders of firmware zone.

Security subsystem menu option contains commands, which allow reviewing and resetting master and user
passwords in a hard drive.

4.1.1.3. Translator operations


Regenerate Translator – accomplishes recalculation of a drive’s translator, modules 20h and 25h, based on the
defects’ tables of P- and (or) G-List. The need for recalculation appears, when the 20h and (or) 25h modules in the
firmware zone get corrupted, please see details in section 7.1.

4.1.1.4. Spindle stop


The option sends a SLEEP command; it is used for HOT-SWAP operations.

4.1.1.5. Change Time scale


When the utility reaches a timeout it terminates the current command and displays a message informing the
user that the HDD has not reported on readiness within 15 sec. However, some HDD models may require a lot of time
to report on readiness, especially those with corrupted modules in firmware zone – 3 and more minutes. Use the
Change Time scale feature to increase the 15-second wait period by entering the corresponding factor (1 - 15 sec, 2 - 30
sec, etc.).

4.1.2. Drive description

Drive description – brings the drive’s disk description on the screen. All non-displayable ASCII characters are replaced
with spaces. Drive’s description, i.e. logical structure parameters and serial number can be corrected. When it is
necessary to correct the model name you should first set MODEL FROM ROM parameter to NO by pressing [Space].
Press [Enter] to enter the parameter or to proceed to editing the next one; press [Esc] if you do not want to rewrite the
drive description area.

4.1.3. Formatting
Formatting – starts the low-level formatting procedure. During formatting the drive skips defective sectors and
defective tracks reading their numbers from the defects table (if the method using one or another table has been
selected). The formatting procedure cannot be interrupted because after its completion translator recalculation and
recording are performed. If format ends in error it means presence of corrupt servo information or incorrectly compiled
defects table. Even if formatting ends in error, the translator is recalculated and recorded, though not all the surface of
the drive will be formatted. Before the start of formatting you have to select the defects table mode or formatting
without defects table data. Formatting takes approximately 40 minutes, but it depends on the model, condition of
magnetic disks and can grow considerably with defective surfaces.

4.1.4. Logical structure scanning

Logical structure scanning – starts the defects detection procedure utilizing logical parameters in LBA. The test routine
does not differ in any way from that for the previous drive families, please see details in the description for WD Arch.4
“PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.

4.1.5. S.M.A.R.T. table

S.M.A.R.T. table – allows viewing S.M.A.R.T. parameters of a drive. You can read in detail about S.M.A.R.T. in the
PC-3000AT tester description.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
6 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

4.1.6. Defects table

Defects table – allows to view, add, clear defects table or perform defects grouping:
View defects table. This command displays the table of relocated defects in a drive. Viewing defects’ tables
helps estimate the quality and status of the magnetic disks used in a drive. At the manufacturing factory defects are
added to P-List only; thus presence of records in the G-List means new defects.
Add physical track. Allows to enter physical defective tracks manually.
Import logical defects table. This command allows to add values from a *.dft file to the G-List table of defects.
Such a file may be prepared, for instance, by Defectoscope 2.10 software or any other program. The *.dft file structure
is described in the supplement to the Defectoscope utility. After adding the defects formatting must be performed.

Clear defects table. After execution of that command the respective defects table will be reset – the number of
defective sectors becomes equal to 0. The user has to select which table should be cleared.
Move G-List to P-List. This command adds the contents of G-List table to the contents of P-List table; G-List
is reset during this procedure. This mode does not influence the drive operation in any way but it allows to increase the
S.M.A.R.T. parameter of Relocated Sector Count.
Group to tracks. This menu item allows to group into defective tracks those defective sectors, which already
are entered into the tables of defects. When you enter the mode you will see the message: LIMIT OF GROUPING
INTO TRACKS. Then you have to enter the limit value above which sector defects should be grouped into defective
tracks in both P-List and G-List tables. The input range is from 1 to 50.

4.1.7. Automatic mode


Automatic mode allows scanning the drive automatically without operator intervention. When this mode is selected two
lists appear on the screen: TASKS LIST and AVAILABLE TASKS. Before testing starts a test program must be
created or a previously created one loaded.
Attention! The work in the automatic mode does not differ in any way from that for the previous drive families;
please see details in the description for WD Arch.4 “PC-A313000, PC-A310100, PC-A38400, PC-A36400”.
Exit – exits from the utility.

4.2. SAFE MODE

The mode provides access to a limited number of drive features. The safe mode is meant for testing the printed circuit
boards (PCB) separately from their HDAs. However, after switching a drive into safe mode you may leave a PCB on its
HDA. In order to enable the safe mode you should set three jumpers at once: CS, SLAVE, MASTER and switch on the
power. The drive at that does not process bits D6 (DRDY) and D4 (DSC) in the status register. The following menu
appears after selection of that mode:
Work with ROM
PCB testing
Work with ROM menu option allows access to recording, reading and viewing of a drive’s ROM:
Viewing ROM information command displays on-screen firmware version, the version of the links’ table, the
list of models supported in that drive family and heads mapping:
Copyright 2001 WDC
ROM version : 06.40 G
ROM revision : 33
Links table version : 04.27
Supported models
WDC WD200BB
WDC WD400BB
WDC WD600BB
WDC WD800BB
WDC WD1000BB
WDC WD1200BB

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 7
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

Heads assignment data


Heads assignment : default
Changing heads map in ROM1 - that mode allows software access in order to disable or enable previously
disabled magnetic heads in a drive. The mode is identical to the similar mode described in section 4.1.1.1. “Work with
ROM”.
Reading ROM command accomplishes reading of ROM contents to a file with *.bin extension. If you select
that operation you should enter the file name without an extension. The read-in file will be placed in the current
PC3000 subdirectory.
Writing ROM2 command accomplishes recording of drive ROM from a file. During the procedure you should
first select an *.LMC loader file, then select a *.bin file to be recorded, it has to be in the PC3000 subdirectory. As soon
as the file is selected, the actual recording process begins. The method of recording ROM is described in more detail in
section 8.
PCB test command allows checking several components of a drive’s electronics board, namely, it can sector buffer test
and initiate internal self-diagnostic. Please see details of those modes in the description to the PC-3000AT tester.

5. Brief technical description of Spartan, Caviar, Protege Arch-V, and


Caviar Arch VI drive families.
External views of electronics boards in Spartan, Protege, Caviar Arch. V, and Caviar Arch. VI drive families are shown
in Fig. 5.1., Fig. 5.2, Fig. 5.3, and Fig. 5.4. respectively.

U5

WD70C12-SW M29F102BB

U2
WDC © 2000

U4

MASTER 1
SLAVE U6
CS U3
1 U1 1. US1235
2. L6262 2.6

Standard Configuration Settings


Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS
SLAVE

CS

CS
MASTER

SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS

Fig. 5.1. External view of the electronics board in Spartan drive family.

1 The mode is unavailable in the WD Spartan drive family.


2 The operation is possible only in drives, where parallel Flash ROM is used.
Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
8 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

U4

U2

M29F102BB
U5
WD70C23-GP

D7
L6

1 U6 U8
MASTER
SLAVE U7
CS
1 U1 1. IRU1239SC
3 2. ST755
3. 50G64741
Q4 4. L6278 AC

Standard Configuration Settings


Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS
SLAVE
CS

CS
SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS
Fig. 5.2. External view of the electronics board in Protege drive family.

U4

U2
M29F102BB

U5
WD70C23-GP
L6
D7
U6 U8
1
MASTER
SLAVE U7
CS
1 3 U1 1. IRU1329
2. ST755
3. 50G66474
Q4 4. L6278 1.2

Standard Configuration Settings


Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS

CS

CS
SLAVE

SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS

Fig. 5.3. External view of the electronics board in Caviar Arch. V drive family.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 9
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

U4
U9
Q3 L7
U5
D7
WD70C22-GP
U12

U6
1
MASTER
SLAVE U7
CS 1. IRU1239SC
1 3 2. 26P10AV
3. 88C5540-LFE
4. L6282 3.2E
U1
5. 349T
6. 25 MHz
Standard Configuration Settings
Master only Master with Slave Slave Safe Mode
1 1 1 1
CS
SLAVE
CS

CS
MASTER
SLAVE

SLAVE
MASTER

MASTER

MASTER
SLAVE
CS
Fig. 5.4. External view of the electronics board in Caviar Arch. VI drive family.

5.1. The structure of HDD firmware

Firmware of WD HDDs consists of a microprogram stored in ROM, a configuring links table also located in
ROM, a loadable firmware portion and data in the service area of a drive (DISK Firmware). The firmware is
characterized by its revision number (F/W Rev.), which defines its development and compatibility.
Firmware part Version, example Location
Microprogram 06.40G ROM
Links table 04.27 ROM
Loadable firmware version, tables 06.C0G Firmware zone, (cylinders -1 to -32)
You can find out the microcode version and the version of ROM links table using the Viewing ROM information
command. The version of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W) can be displayed by running the Disc firmware
structure test menu item in the standard utility mode. The version indicated in the modules’ directory will be the
version of DISK F/W.
Version number output by the drive in the “firmware version" line after the Identify DRV (ECh) command, i.e.
when the drive ID is viewed, is an aggregative value and contains the information from all three parts of HDD
firmware, e.g.:
ROM firmware: 06.40G
ROM links table: 04.27
DISK F/W: 06.C0G
As a result the compiled version of HDD firmware will look like: 06.04G06. As it can be seen in this example, the
version number was formed using the first bytes from the respective versions of the HDD firmware parts. The letter is
borrowed from the version of ROM microcode. If you read microprogram version in Safe Mode, the DISK F/W part of
the version will be missing, because all operations with disk firmware portion are disabled in that mode.

5.2. Compatibility between electronics boards

Unlike the previous families of WD HDDs, in the Spartan, Caviar, and Protege the manufacturer discontinued
indication of firmware code on the ROM chip label. That complicates selection of replacement PCBs considerably.
Moreover, WD does not adhere to strict classification of Caviar and Protege trademarks and frequently totally identical

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
10 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

and compatible HDDs are named differently. One should also pay attention to the construction peculiarities of head-
and-disk assemblies and, consequently, of their PCBs. We mean the location of the mounting hole on a PCB near the
spindle motor connector. In several PCBs it is located along the centerline of the connector while in some PCBs it is
shifted away from that line, please see Fig.5.1-5.4.
We can offer the following compatibility criteria useful for electronics boards in WD HDDs. First of all, here
belongs the family code indicated in the MDL line over HDA label (see WD classification) and in Table 5.2.1.
Table 5.2.1 several drive family codes of WD HDDs
WD Spartan WD Protégé WD Caviar Arch. V WD Caviar Arch. VI
WD75DA-xxAWxx WD300EB-xxCPxx WD1200BB-xxCAxx WD1200JB-xxEVxx
WD400EB-xxCPxx WD600AB-xxCBxx WD1200JB-xxFUxx
WD800BB-xxCJxx
WD1200JB-xxCRxx
WD200BB-xxCVxx
WD1200BB-xxDAxx
WD400BB-xxDExx
WD200BB-xxDGxx
WD1200BB-xxKAxx
Secondly, you should note the version of firmware in ROM and the number of links’ table. Those numbers can be
identified by switching the PCB to Safe Mode and running the Viewing ROM information command. In the third place
note the mapping of HDD heads. It is also displayed together with reviewed ROM data showing the disabled and active
heads. There is very high probability that knocking sounds will be produced by “non-native” HDAs when used with
totally identical PCBs having compatible firmware versions just because different heads are indicated as enabled in
those boards. Please see details about the mechanism of heads selection during initialization in section 5.5.

5.2.1. HA compatibility (knocking sounds at power-up).

The need for Head assembly (HA) replacement appears when it becomes damaged, i.e. when pre-
amplifier/commutator goes out of order or, more frequently, in case of MR heads’ malfunctions. In such situations a
drive after power-up produces knocking sounds hitting its positioner against the limiting stop. A HDD can be repaired
in case of such malfunction (if the defective MR head does not scratch disks) using software access to disable the
defective head. Of course, the drive’s capacity will decrease, but the HDD will become totally operational. If HDD
repair is of minor importance but valuable user data from that HDD have to be recovered, there is only one way
remaining – it is replacement of damaged HA with a known-good one taken from an operational HDD of the same
model.
Beginning with Arch. V (Spartan, Caviar, and Protege) WD drives demonstrate total disorder as regards
interchangeability of HA. Similar models (with identical MDL lines) may use different number of heads or their
different positions. According to our observational studies, the DCM line (see Fig. 5.2.1.) on HDA label contains
information valuable for compatibility. At least, the letters next to last in DCM of both drives should match if the same
preamplifier-commutators are used in HA (e.g. Fig. 5.2.1, number 2). We recommend using as “donors” drives with a
matching MDL line, matching 2-3 last letters/figures in DCM and with closest dates of manufacture.
S/N: WMAATC607218
MDL : WD300EB-75CPF0
DATE: 03 MAY 2003
DCM : DSBBNV2A
Fig. 5.2.1 Label of WD drives (preamplifier type denoted by figure 2 in DCM).
The utility outputs the DCM information line while reviewing firmware zone structure (see section 4.1.1.2.) displaying
DCM line decoded for a specific drive; however its purpose and applicability for “donor” selection are yet not clear,
probably, that information will be of use in future.

5.3. The structure of loadable firmware portion (DISK F/W)

WD drives have 32 service cylinders (from –32 to –1) used for storage of firmware recorded in two copies
over sides 0 and 1. However only first 8 cylinders (-1 through -8) are actually used for recording of the firmware
modules. Firmware data are stored in the form of individual modules, which constitute together HDD control and
operating system. Navigation between the modules is performed in accordance with the modules’ directory containing

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 11
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

the address of each module, its identifier and length. Each module, in its turn, has a standard header containing its date,
checksum, identifier, version number and module length expressed in sectors. Please see the main DISK F/W modules
in the summary table below.
Table 5.3.1 Functional purpose of modules
Module Purpose
ID, hex
01 Loadable portion of firmware code
02 Loadable portion of firmware code
10 Loadable portion of firmware code
11 Loadable portion of firmware code
12 Loadable portion of firmware code
14 Loadable portion of firmware code
17 ? 2 sect. table (usually empty)
18 ? 2 sect. table (usually empty)
19 Loadable portion of firmware code
20 Translator
21 Translator
22 Translator
23 Translator
25 Translator
26 Module containing SMART parameters
29 Module containing SMART parameters
2A SMART log
2B SMART log
2C SMART log
2D Module containing SMART parameters
2E Initial table of SMART parameters, it is not used during drive operation and serves as a model
2F SMART/RESERV log
36 Loadable portion of firmware code
41 (~dir) Modules directory (the table of modules location within firmware zone)
42 Configuration table (HDD ID)
43 P-LIST defects table
44 G-LIST defects table
46 ? Adaptive parameters
48 ? Adaptive parameters
49 ? Adaptive parameters
4A ? Adaptive parameters
4B ? Adaptive parameters
4C ? Adaptive parameters
4D ? Adaptive parameters
4E Log (versions of: ROM firmware, links table in ROM, DISK F/W, lots of other info), frequently empty
59 4 sector table, purpose?
5A Table or log, occupies 1 sect., purpose?
5B Table or log, occupies 1 sect., purpose?
61 Loadable portion of firmware code, the part which performs overwriting of Flash ROM
7x Tables, 2 sector each, purpose?
BF Bit table, 2 sect., purpose?
C4 Calibrator module
ɋ5 Calibrator log
Ex Reserved?
Fx Reserved?
FF Selfscan module

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
12 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

5.3.1. Critical modules for drive data

The translator modules (20h – 25h) and modules containing adaptive parameters (46h-4Dh) are traditionally
essential for data integrity in drives belonging to Spartan, Caviar, Protege families, there may be other important
modules, but we haven’t identified any so far. Besides, yet unknown remains the degree of importance for the modules
containing adaptive parameters and the opportunities for their replacement if the original modules become corrupted.
If the translator modules get corrupted you can perform their recalculation based on the P and (or) G-List
defects tables and overwrite them. The procedure is performed by the Regenerate Translator command (please see
details on restoration of damaged modules in chapter 7).

5.4. Data structure in Flash ROM in WD Caviar and Protege drive families

The structure of parallel Flash ROM in those drives differs from earlier families. First of all, it is manifested in
the presence of heads’ table (there is no such table in earlier drive families, like WD-Spartan, WDxxxAA,).
Table 5.5.1 describes the structure of parallel Flash ROM contents, newer families are based on serial Flash
ROM chips using a different data structure.
Table 5.5.1
Address Length Purpose
0h 512 bytes Interrupt vectors
200 h … Microprocessor control firmware code
… …
1EBxx h 15 bytes Copyright 2001 WDC
1EBxx h 3 bytes WDC (keyword, followed by ROM firmware version)
+3 h 7 bytes ROM firmware version, ASCII
+A h 1 byte ROM revision (HDD family code)
+B h 120 bytes Supported HDD models (6 records, 20 bytes each, ASCII)
+83 h … Links table (configuring jump table)
… 5 bytes Links table version, ASCII (the last element of the links table)
1FFD0 h 31 bytes Table of active heads
+2 h 1 byte Heads table flag (00-assignment according to heads table, 01- according to MHA
polling)
+3h 1 byte Maximum possible number of heads for the drive family, usually 6
+4h 1 byte The number of active (enabled) heads
+5h 1 byte Bit map of active (enabled) heads
+ 31 h 1 byte Checksum byte for the heads’ table
… …
ROM data consists of executable microprocessor code and various tables including jump tables. However, those
portions do not have fixed constant addresses; their locations are floating depending upon ROM version, and that
circumstance complicates indexing of data tables. Therefore they are searched using keywords and offsets.

5.5. Modification of drive configuration, software heads deactivation

At power-up a drive configures itself as a specific model of its family during initialization. The FLT/SE signal
produced by the commutator pre-amplifier chip and MR heads polling are used for that purpose After spin-up of the
spindle motor the drive microprocessor sequentially checks all heads beginning with the zero one. When a missing head
is detected, the FLT/SE signal is sent to the microprocessor. Thus the drive determines precisely the number of heads
and configures itself as a corresponding model.
Beginning with Protege and Caviar drive families the manufacturer changed the algorithm of adjustment for
MHA type. ROM (beginning with address 1FFD0h) has been supplemented with heads mapping containing records of
their total number and enabled heads. The map contains a byte, which serves as a flag switching the method to be used
by microprocessor for identification of the total number of heads and the enabled ones – MHA polling or heads
mapping in ROM. During drive initialization its microprocessor reads the heads mapping byte after MR heads polling.
If the flag is not set, the processor uses information about drive heads received after MHA polling; if the byte is set, it
uses respectively the heads mapping in ROM. Then the drive configures itself as a specific HDD model and reads
firmware data.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 13
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

The mechanism can be utilized to disable or enable previously disabled heads using software access.
Manufacturing factories frequently ship drives with some magnetic heads already disabled, they can be enabled using
software access and turn out to be absolutely operational! The need to use software access in order to disable/enable
drive heads arises when they become damaged or when you have to adapt a PCB to a HDA containing thus disabled
heads.
WARNING! If you define the flag “by mapping” for a HDD, which used default heads mapping before that, then
the Total number of heads and Active heads values will equal 0, thus all heads become configured as disabled.
In that case you should set the value “Full heads amount” = 6 (as the maximum allowed in the drive family)
and enable the suggested heads, e.g. 0 and 1 for a model with 2 heads. If the drive starts knocking after that, it means
that the heads have been enabled incorrectly and you should attempt to select two other heads, e.g. 1 and 2 or 2 and 3.
You can also try to enable heads one by one and thus determine all operational heads.
WARNING! If a drive starts knocking after modification of heads mapping, you have done something wrong. In
that case you should switch the PCB to Safe Mode and record the original ROM (saved prior to mapping
modification). Always save the native ROM before making changes to heads mapping.

6. Software restoration of a drive


Depending upon the condition of the drive being repaired, certain operations might be necessary for its
restoration. For example, if at power-up a drive does not spin up the spindle motor or spins it up and stops, then such a
defect most likely has to deal with the electronics board and requires its repair. If a drive starts to spin up the spindle
motor and monotonously knocks with its positioner against locking plate instead of recalibration, then such a defect
demonstrates malfunctions of the drive’s servo system and can be caused by one of the following:
- ROM version on electronic controller board is incompatible with the sealed HDA;
- incorrect heads mapping;
- malfunction of commutator pre-amplifier chip of the HA inside the HDA;
- malfunction of the HA itself;
- seriously corrupt servo data or a shift of magnetic disks pack after a shock (increased noise of spindle motor
rotation usually and case vibration show that the drive has been hit).
In all of the above cases except for the first two software restoration of the drive is impossible.

If after switching power on the drive spins up the spindle motor and unparks the magnetic heads, but while entering the
PC-3000AT program generates the ABRT (04h) error, or errors appear one after another while reading drive surfaces,
or it takes too long to report on readiness, then it means that the drive cannot read firmware data from disk. That kind of
defect may arise from:
- data reading/conversion channel malfunction;
- firmware modules corruption;
- incompatibility between the disk firmware version and the firmware code recorded in the control board
ROM.
In such case ensure that the control board is functional (the best method is swapping of the boards), the ROM and HDA
versions are compatible, and begin the hardware data restoration from step 1.
If after switching power on the drive initializes, recalibrates, and its drive ID is read, but testing reveals BAD sectors,
then the restoration should be started from step 2.
1. Restore firmware data (F/W). The F/W restoration procedure is as follows:
a). Perform “DISC FIRMWARE STRUCTURE TEST” and identify corrupted modules. If just some modules
are damaged while others remain normal, you can overwrite the defective modules using the method described
in section 7.
b). If the majority of modules are corrupted in a drive select the “DISC FIRMWARE ZONE” menu option and
run the “DISC FIRMWARE SURFACE TEST” command. Make sure that there is no considerable damage in
firmware zone. If necessary, CLEAR FIRMWARE ZONE but prior to that procedure save modules, which can
be copied and firmware area image, see section 4.1.1.2.

Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
14 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

c). Select the menu items: “DISC FIRMWARE DATA READ/WRITE”, “WRITE FW TO THE DISK” and write
the firmware data to the drive being restored, observe its compatibility with the version of the drive processor
microcode. After successful recording the firmware is restarted.
d). Correct the logical parameters, if necessary.
2. Clear the GLIST defects table and reset SMART. You will have to reset the P-LIST table if you have disabled HDD
heads, if external firmware has been recorded to the drive or if P-LIST has been copied from another drive.
3. Perform low-level formatting using P-LIST, which should complete successfully. If formatting ends in an error one
of drive surfaces may have corrupt servo information. You can attempt to use grouping into tracks (defective tracks
block corrupted servo fields) or isolate the side containing too many defects.
4. Perform LOGICAL STRUCTURE SCANNING procedure, which is executed in LBA format. After completion of
surface scanning procedure a table of all detected logical defects in LBA notation will be output on the screen. Pressing
[Enter] converts all logical defects into physical addresses and adds them to the G-LIST defects table.
5. Using the results of tests 3 and 4 make a conclusion concerning the necessity of defective surfaces isolation (see
section 5.5.). After turning off defective sides it is necessary to continue the drive restoration beginning with step 2.
6. Perform low-level format using P and G-List.
7. Write serial number into the drive ID area, if necessary.
8. Perform COMPLEX TEST with the PC-3000AT tester. If errors are detected repeat steps 3-6 or run the UNIVERSAL
DEFECTS RELOCATION procedure.
9. Run the PC-3000AT tester COMPLEX TEST and make sure that the drive is operational.

7. Restoration of firmware modules


A defect of firmware data modules is a frequently occurring fault. The malfunction manifests itself as follows: the
drive spins up the spindle motor, remains unable to report on readiness for a very long time (more than a minute), then
it reports on readiness but responds to any command with the ABRT error.
Diagnostics of such malfunction requires to select the "DISC FIRMWARE STRUCTURE TESTING" command
in the "DISC FIRMWARE ZONE/ DISC FIRMWARE ZONE " menu, and to inspect which modules are defective in the
"FIRMWARE MODULES" table. Modules 20h, 21h, 25h (translator), 2Ah, 2Dh (SMART), etc. suffer from corruption
most frequently.
Overwriting the modules requires using the Disc Firmware data read/write command from the DISC
FIRMWARE ZONE menu. The procedure requires first reading all modules from a drive; they are subsequently added
to the following directories: WDABJMOD for WD-Caviar, WDEB_MOD for WD-Protege and WDDA_MOD for
WD-Spartan. Then you should replace the damaged modules in that directory with normal ones copied from an
operational compatible drive and record the modules back to the HDD.
Some of the modules are critical for data protection and should not be overwritten with modules from another
drive if you wish to preserve the user's data, for example, the 20h - 25h translator modules, 46h - 49h modules
containing adaptive parameters. Other modules are not so essential and they can be overwritten, however, it is better
to copy normal modules from the same HDD model with an identical firmware version.
Anyway, prior to starting the drive restoration it is necessary to save all the modules and the ROM
firmware to ensure an opportunity to reverse the changes.

7.1. HDD translator recalculation

Translator restoration can be invoked as follows: Disc Firmware zone, Disc Firmware zone, Regenerate,
Translator. Upon entering the mode you will be offered to select the basic tables to be used for the recalculation:
Take into account PLIST and G-LIST
Take into account Use PLIST
Take into account Use G-LIST
Do not take into account neither PLIST nor G-LIST
Factory testing of a drive appends defects to the P-List table (primary) only; the G-List (Grown) table remains empty. It
is filled in the process of drive operation by the device itself in the Data Lifeguard and Assign modes. Thus, translator
of a drive arriving from a factory is recalculated using P-List only. Therefore if you restore a drive with corrupted 20h
and 25h modules, the procedure should be performed using P-List only, in that case access to user data will be restored.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 15
Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI Ɋɋ-3000 £
"PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2" ¤ ACELab

8. Flash ROM recording


WD Spartan, Caviar, and Protege drives are equipped with Flash ROM (although some models contain a
write-once chip) which can be overwritten in normal HDD operating mode (after a drive has reported on readiness) or
in the Safe Mode (on a separated PCB). Only overwriting is possible, because Safe Mode is a software mode of the
control firmware stored in ROM. If a portion of ROM gets corrupted or erased, overwriting of the chip contents on
board becomes impossible. Therefore you will have to unsolder the chip, program it using a ROM programmer and
then solder it back.
ROM recording in standard mode requires that the HDD reports on readiness and reads its firmware data (at
least one copy). Then select in the utility commands Firmware zone, Work with ROM, Writing ROM, the following
menu will be displayed:
Drive module 61h
External *.LMC module
If you select the first variant the utility will use for recording the native firmware module ID=61h copied from
HDD service area. It is exactly the one containing subroutines for operations with ROM (type identification, erasure
and recording). If you select the second variant you will be offered to use an external loader that is nothing else than
module ID=61h, copied earlier from an operational drive and renamed to *.lmc. It may be necessary if the respective
module in firmware zone turns out to be corrupted or “non-native”.
Recording in Safe Mode requires just an operational PCB (HDA is not used). You have to switch at that the
drive to Safe Mode by setting three jumpers together: CS, SLAVE, MASTER and turning the power on. Then select the
mode: Safe Mode, Work with ROM, Write ROM, the following menu will be displayed:
Select an *.lmc loader file
Then you will be offered to select a loader from those supplied with the utility: spartan.lmc, protege.lmc or caviar.lmc
for WD Spartan, WD Protege and WD Caviar HDD respectively.
A situation is possible, when the manufacturer changes the type of Flash ROM on drive PCB so that the
supplied loaders would not support that type, then ROM will not be overwritten in Safe Mode. In such case you can
copy module 61h from a drive belonging to a corresponding family and supporting that Flash ROM type, rename it to
*.lmc and attempt to overwrite the ROM contents again. After loader selection you will have to select a binary *.bin
file containing the ROM firmware. The loader file and firmware ROM file should be located in the current PC-3000
directory.
After recording it is necessary to read the ROM and compare the files.

8.1. Creation of an external loader file

In order to produce an external loader file copy the ~id61.rpm module from an operational drive with a Flash
ROM chip of the required type. Rename the file so that it receives the Loader Micro Code (lmc) extension.
The standard package contains several loaders to be selected in accordance with the families of drives being
repaired, see the table:
Family Original file Renamed loader file
WD Caviar Arch. VI, Serial ROM ? none
WD Caviar Arch. V ~id61.rpm Caviar
WD Protege ~id61.rpm Protege
WD Spartan ~id61.rpm Spartan

9. Electric circuit
WD Spartan, Protege, Caviar Arch. V and Caviar Arch. VI drives use different electronics boards (see Fig.5.1 - 5.4)
and electric circuits, but labels of elements on PCBs match in most cases. That helps to use the basic electric circuit
even in those cases, when it does not fully match the PCB of a HDD.

9.1. Reference voltage sources

Checking all voltage generating devices (see electric circuits: WDxxxBB/JB R/W Channel, SPINDLE
MOTOR Control and WDxxxBB/JB L6278 1.2) is the first thing to do for diagnostics of malfunctions in the
electronics board of a HDD. WD Spartan, Protege, and Caviar drives use six voltages, they are: +12V, +5V (from the
PC power supply), +3.3V, +2.6V (generated by the U6 IRU1329SC stabilizer), +1.8V (generated by the U7 chip when
Technical support: pc-3000support@acelab.ru
(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
16 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £ Western Digital "Spartan", "Protege", "Caviar" Generation electronics Arch-V, Arch-VI
¤ ACELab "PCWD_DA", "PCWD_EB", "PCWD_ABJ", "PCWD_CB2"

an external power control on Q4 is employed) and a -5V source that supplies power to the preamplifier-commutator
(generated using the U8 chip of the DC-DC ST755 converter). In Caviar Arch. VI drives -5V negative voltage
generator is based upon the FG2M chip and Q3 power switch (see electric circuit WDxxxBB/JB Serial ROM,
Converter DC-DC -5V). It is essential to check +5V and -5V supply voltages directly over the J1 pocket-plate MHA
connector, pins 4 and 2 respectively (see electric circuit WDxxxBB/JB R/W Channel, SPINDLE MOTOR Control). A
malfunction may be manifested in divergence or absence of supply or reference voltages because of defective
stabilizers, power switches or their control schemes. You should also check the L2, L4, L5, and L6 filter inductors
since supply voltages may disappear when they are broken.
Use digital millivoltmeter and an oscilloscope for measurements of supply and reference voltages. The
voltmeter is useful for checking voltage values, oscilloscope checks pulses.

9.2. Control circuit of spindle motor and positioner


The control circuit of spindle motor in WD drives may be based either on L6278 1.2 or on L6278AC/AH
chips. Those two chips have different packages, different number of pins; they are incompatible though their
functionality is practically identical. The chips operate on several voltages +12V, +5V and +3.3V. The chips are
controlled using software access via a serial bus. The SHUT-DOWN line is used by the drive’s microcontroller for
sending a signal activating the spindle motor control chip, -5V converter and the reading channel chip. Upon power-up,
system reset, and initialization of the microcontroller, the line must propagate log. “1” signal; at the same time starting
pulses of phase switching should appear on the spindle motor phases with 12V range. If you disconnect the demand
(i.e. spindle motor) by taking the PCB off the HDA, then you should be able to observe on the outputs of 3 phases in
L6278 chip clear rectangular two-level pulses with 6 and 12V range. At the “midpoint” pin the static level should be
equal to 6V (small needle-like surges are allowed at phase switching moments).
Please note that the spindle motor will not start in Safe Mode, consequently you will have to test its control
chip in normal operation mode (with all configuration jumpers disabled, see details on Safe Mode). If the L6278 chip
goes out of order, one can notice signs of defects or overheating on its package. Before its replacement it is essential to
check the supply voltages and load carrying elements in - D1, D2 framework; also use ohmmeter to check the
resistance of the spindle motor windings (phases), it should be equal to 2,2 Ohm.

9.3. Data reading channel


It is based on the 50G6474 chip manufactured by WD. The chip is quite reliable and proves defective rather
rarely. Its diagnostics requires checking of 3.3V supply voltages and the operation of the built-in 1,8 V regulator based
on an external Q4 switch. Then initiation of Y1 crystal clock has to be checked.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 17
A
R37

3
U12 +3.3V
JP2(1)
C IRF9240
WD70c22(101) 1 S Vcc 8

JP2(7)
2 Q HOLD 7 JP2(9)
1 2
WD70c22(104) WD70c22(108)
3 W C 6 JP2(4)
WD70c22(105) WD70c22(103) 3 2 1
JP2(8) 4 GND D 5 JP2(3)
WD70c22(102) FG2M

+5V
4 5
M25P10(SROM) C 4.7mkf
R 100om
+5V

C R25 C79 2
R Q3
1
R24 0om R21 C109

E36
IRF9240
3
A D2
Plug to HDA A
R
J1(2)
FG2M 5
C47 2.2mkF -5V
3 L L
FB Vin
SW 1
4 Sens
R GND

R R R R R124 R125 R R
C2
1om 1om 1om 1om 1om 1om 1om 1om

Title
WDxxxxBB/JB Serial ROM, Converter DC-DC -5V
Size Document Number Rev
A ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 1

Date: Tuesday, January 06, 2004 Sheet 1 of 1


A
A

C
R (10k)
plug to HDA
-5V R 80 (0.5) C72 C33
J1(2)

C61 C71 U8 ST755 C68


R
J1 5 Vo CC 4

19 R
D7 6 3
GND SS
R77(2om) R(1om) R(1om) L6
C80 R6
C R79
17 7 LX Vref 2
R1

Voice Coil
+5V 8 Vcc SHDN 1
R R R

plug to HDA C C69


Converter
DC-DC -5V
C

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23
33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

24

23
34 34 22 22 +5V
C5 R28
35 35 21 21
WD70C23(56)
A J6
36 36 U1 20 20
E90 A
37 37 19 19 +12V SHUT-DOWN control(Vcc=ON,GND=OFF)
38 18
2 38 L6278 1.2 18
39 39 17 17 WD70C23-GP(80)
40 40 16 16 WD70C23-GP(84)
3
41 41 15 15 +3.3V
42 42 14 14 WD70C23-GP(89)
4
43 43 13 13 C5

44 44 12 12
R16 R15 R14

10

11
1

9
1

10

11
1

9
SPINDLE MOTOR C12 C6
C

D1
R23(10 kOM)
+12V
C9 C13

3.3V

Title
WD70C23-GP(82) WD70C23-GP(81) WD70C23-GP(83) WDxxxxBB/JB L6278 1.2
Size Document Number Rev
B ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 1

Date: Wednesday, March 17, 2004 Sheet 1 of 1


A
A

U2 M29F102BB U4 K4S1616220

WD70C23(119) 1 A9 Vss 40
1 1 50 50
WD70C23(120) 2 A10 A8 39 WD70C23(98)
WD70C23(139) 2 2 49 49 WD70C23(147)
WD70C23(121) 3 A11 A7 38 WD70C23(99)
WD70C23(140) 3 3 48 48 WD70C23(149)
WD70C23(122) 4 A12 A6 37 WD70C23(100)
4 4 47 47
WD70C23(124) 5 A13 A5 36 WD70C23(101)
WD70C23(141) 5 5 46 46 WD70C23(150)
WD70C23(125) 6 A14 A4 35 WD70C23(103) L5
WD70C23(142) 6 6 45 45 WD70C23(151)
WD70C23(126) 7 A15 A3 34 WD70C23(104)
+3.3V 7 7 44 44
WD70C23(127) 8 NC A2 33 WD70C23(105)
WD70C23(143) 8 8 43 43 WD70C23(152)
WD70C23(128) 9 W A1 32 WD70C23(106)
WD70C23(144) 9 9 42 42 WD70C23(154)
+5V 10 Vcc A0 31 WD70C23(107)
R29 (10k) 10 41
E1 10 41 E
+3.3V 11 RP G 30 WD70C23(108)
WD70C23(145) 11 11 40 40 WD70C23(155)
WD70C23(129) 12 E DQ0 29 WD70C23(110)
WD70C23(146) 12 12 39 39 WD70C23(156)
WD70C23(130) 13 DQ15 DQ1 28 WD70C23(111)
A 13 13 38 38 A
WD70C23(131) 14 DQ14 DQ2 27 WD70C23(112)
E 14 14 37 37 E
WD70C23(132) 15 DQ13 DQ3 26 WD70C23(113)
WD70C23(168) 15 15 36 36
WD70C23(133) 16 DQ12 DQ4 25 WD70C23(114)
16 35 R36
WD70C23(169) 16 35 WD70C23(157)
WD70C23(135) 17 DQ11 DQ5 24 WD70C23(115) WD70C23(176)
WD70C23(170) 17 17 34 34
WD70C23(136) 18 DQ10 DQ6 23 WD70C23(116)
E 18 18 33 33 E
WD70C23(137) 19 DQ9 DQ7 22 WD70C23(117)
WD70C23(171) 19 19 32 32 WD70C23(160)
20 21 R17 (10k)
WD70C23(138) DQ8 Vss
WD70C23(172) 20 20 31 31 WD70C23(162)
C16 21 30
WD70C23(173) 21 30 WD70C23(163)

WD70C23(174) 22 22 29 29 WD70C23(164)

WD70C23(175) 23 23 28 28 WD70C23(165)

E 24 24 27 27 WD70C23(166)
25 25 26 26

C37 C24 C51

Title
WDxxxxBB/JB ROM, RAM
Size Document Number Rev
A4 ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 2

Date: Wednesday, March 17, 2004 Sheet 2 of 2


A
A

WD70C23(62)
C47 WD70C23(63) WD70C23(66)
J1

WD70C23(61)
R (10k) C64

WD70C23(57)

WD70C23(59)
WD70C23(58)
WD70C23(67)
19 plug to HDA C63
R 80 (0.5) C C33 WD70C23(68)
R (1.0) R(1.0)
-5V

WD70C23(64)
J1(2)
R1
17
C61 C71 U8 ST755 C68
C
R C
Voice Coil 5 4
C53
R R65 Vo CC
R C28 C26
R WD70C23(55)
plug to HDA D7 6 GND SS 3
L6 R

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41
C80 R6
plug to HDA C48
7 2

60

59

58

57

56

55

54

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

44

43

42

41
LX Vref
61 61 40 40
J1(20)
C C E 62 39
D2 J1(18) 62 39 WD70C23(69)
8 Vcc SHDN 1
+12V +5V
63 63 38 38
C13 C9 J1(14) WD70C23(70)
36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25
C57 64 37
C86 64 37 WD70C23(71)
Converter
36

35

34

33

32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25
37 24 65 36
37 24 +5V DC-DC -5V 65 36 C45
38 38 23 23 E 66 66 35 35

39 22 R9 C 67 34

40
39

40 U1
22

21 21
E

+12V
68
67

68
U7 34

33 33
WD70C23(73)

WD70C23(72)
SHUT-DOWN control(Vcc=ON,GND=OFF) C35
41 41 20 20 69 69 32 32
WD70C23(74)
42 42 L6278AC 19 19
R39 WD70C23(80)
R28 (470)
plug to HDA C36
70 70
50G6474 IBMBM 1.1 31 31 WD70C23(75)
R14 WD70C23(56)
43 43 18 18 WD70C23(84) 71 71 30 30
C44
J1(1) E5
44 44 17 17 72 72 29 29
WD70C23(76)
R15 45 16 73 28
45 16 WD70C23(89) J1(3) L4 E 73 28 WD70C23(77)
46 46 15 15 E 74 74 27 27 WD70C23(78)
R16 C5 J1(4) +5V
47 47 14 14 3.3V VOLTAGE REGULATOR C58 + 100mkf E 75 75 26 26

48 13 U6 IRU1329SC 76 25 C43
48 3 J1(10) 76 25
121
10

11
1

77 77 24 24
C6 WD70C23(79)
10

11

12
1

78 23
A J1(7)
79
78 23
22
C42 A
J1(5) 79 22

1.24V
GND
1.2V

3.3V

2.6V
Vdd
Vcc
C8 80 21
80 21 WD70C23(93)

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20
1

9
C12 R10 R2 (0)
+3.3V Y1
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20
R23(10k)

9
4 3
+5V +12V
5 2
R24
6 1
J6 1 2 3 4 WD70C23 (82) (81) WD70C23(83) C
L2
+3.3V

+ C50 100mkf

C17 C18 C C C C

Q4
SPINDLE MOTOR

1
+2.6V +1.8V
3 2
+3.3V
+2.6V C76
REGULATOR +1.8V C66 C65

WD70C23(153) WD70C23(2) WD70C23(43) WD70C23(88) WD70C23(118) WD70C23(134) WD70C23(25) WD70C23(102) WD70C23(65) WD70C23(94) WD70C23(161)

Q4 2
C19 C20 C22 C52 C55 C56 C31 C34 C40 C C49

1 2 3
U6

IRU1329C

Title
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WDxxxxBB/JB R/W Channel, SPINDLE MOTOR Control
Size Document Number Rev
ACE Lab. PC-3000 Documentation 1

Date: Wednesday, March 17, 2004 Sheet 1 of 2

A
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Fujitsu Co, Ltd (Arh. ARM7)

Contents

1. Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................................2
2. Structure of drive families...............................................................................................................................................2
3. Basic options for repair of Fujitsu drives........................................................................................................................2
4. Preparation for work. ......................................................................................................................................................2
5. Utility usage. ...................................................................................................................................................................3
5.1. Servo test................................................................................................................................................................3
5.2. Surface scanning. ...................................................................................................................................................4
5.3. Disk firmware zone................................................................................................................................................5
5.4. Drive ID. ................................................................................................................................................................8
5.5. Formatting..............................................................................................................................................................8
5.6. Logical scanning. ...................................................................................................................................................8
5.7. S.M.A.R.T. table ....................................................................................................................................................9
5.8. Defects table...........................................................................................................................................................9
5.9. Automatic mode...................................................................................................................................................10
6. Brief technical description of ARM7-based families of Fujitsu drives.........................................................................10
6.1. MPF3xxxAT family.............................................................................................................................................10
6.1.1. Disk space organization in MPF3xxxAT family drives................................................................................10
6.1.2. Modification of drive configuration..............................................................................................................12
6.2. MPG3xxxAT/H/E family.....................................................................................................................................13
6.2.1. Disk space organization in MPG3xxxAT/H/E family drives........................................................................13
6.2.2. Modification of drive configuration..............................................................................................................15
7. Repair of ARM7-based Fujitsu drives. .........................................................................................................................16
7.1. Hardware repair. ..................................................................................................................................................16
7.1.1. Structure chart...............................................................................................................................................16
7.1.2. Initialization. .................................................................................................................................................17
7.1.3. Microcircuitry malfunctions..........................................................................................................................17
7.2. Software repair.....................................................................................................................................................18
7.2.1. Drive restoration algorithm. ..........................................................................................................................18
7.2.2. Tests' duration. ..............................................................................................................................................19
8. Special utility files for Fujitsu drives. ...........................................................................................................................19
9. Restoration of hardware modules in the MPF-AT and MPG families..........................................................................20
10. ROM data structure in MPF-AT and MPG drive families..........................................................................................20
10.1. Mutex byte in ROM. ..........................................................................................................................................21
11. On compatibility between ROM firmware and HDA service data in MPF-AT and MPG drive families (boards
compatibility)....................................................................................................................................................................21
12. Data saving peculiarity in MPF-AT and MPG drive families. ...................................................................................22
13. Password disabling. ....................................................................................................................................................23
14. Patching the module ID=3Dh in non-standard models of MPF-AT, and MPG drive families...................................23
14.1. Fujitsu MPF-AT (PB15). ...................................................................................................................................24
14.2. Fujitsu MPG-AT E (PB16E)..............................................................................................................................24
14.3. Fujitsu MPG-AT (PB16)....................................................................................................................................24
14.4. Fujitsu MPG-AH (PB16 AH), Fujitsu MPG AHE (PB16 AH E)......................................................................24
15. ROM reading/writing to PCB without a HDA (kernel - mode)..................................................................................25
16. Translator recalculation. .............................................................................................................................................25
17. Work with adaptive data. ............................................................................................................................................25
18. Addition of the new firmware ROM into the file Fujitsu.ini. .....................................................................................26
19. Pcb circuit. ..................................................................................................................................................................27

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 1
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

1. Introduction.
This manual contains descriptions of 3" family drives manufactured by Fujitsu Co, Ltd. and based on 32-bit
ARM7 processor of the Advanced Risk Machines (ARM) integrated together with drive electronic components by
Cirrus Logic as well as methods of their repair. It also covers methods of software restoration using PC-3000 complex.
This architecture differs mostly from the previous one based on MB9000 microprocessor by its use of loaded
firmware code. A portion of control code is stored in the control board ROM while another portion is recorded in
firmware zone of module 3Dh and loaded to RAM during initialization. Therefore a mode of direct service data loading
to drive RAM is provided for in the utilities.

2. Structure of drive families.


ARM7-based families:
Family Model name Max. capacity Spindle speed PC-3000 utility
Picobird-16 (PB-16/E/H/HE) MPG3xxxAT/E 40,98 Gb 5,400 rpm Pcfujmpg.exe
MPG3xxxAH/HE 40,98 Gb 7,200 rpm Pcfjmpgh.exe
Picobird-15 (PB-15) MPF3xxxAT 20,49 Gb 5,400 rpm Pcfujmpf.exe

3. Basic options for repair of Fujitsu drives.


The PC-3000 package utilities provide for the following software repair operations:
- drive testing in factory mode;
- restoration of the drive hardware service data (in RAM and on disk);
- writing/reading of the drive's ROM;
- restoration and correction of the serial number in the drive ID area;
- low-level format restoration;
- modification of the drive configuration (isolation of defective surfaces);
- review of the service data structure in the ROM and in disk service zone;
- review of hidden defects table;
- review of drive S.M.A.R.T. table and resetting of attributes;
- physical and logical surface scanning for defects, and, based on the results, addition of revealed defects to the defects
table;
- hiding of defective sectors;
- hiding of defective tracks;
- automatic drives' restoration.
Repair of the drives by reprogramming the loadable firmware part1 allows to:
- correct the physical parameters of the drive in the drive ID zone;
- correct model name.

4. Preparation for work.


1. Connect the Ɋɋ-3000PRO tester cable to the IDE connector of the drive being tested.
2. Connect the power cable to the drive being tested. The utilities support operation with PC-3K PWR power supply
adapter, if present, in that case power is switched automatically depending upon the drive testing mode. If no power
supply control adapter is present, the standard external PC power supply should be used with manual switching of
power on/off according to screen messages.
3. Current directory must contain the utility executables (*.exe) and resource files (*.rsc).
4. Switch on the power supply to the drive being tested. If the PC-3K PWR adapter is present power supply is
controlled via PC keyboard (please see description for shell.com software command shell).
5. Start a respective utility using the shell.com command shell.
Attention! Utility tests have lots of options. It is recommended that novice users work with default test options.

1
Recorded in service zone of module 3Dh on disk;

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
2 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

5. Utility usage.
After utility start the following mode selection menu appears on the screen:
Standard mode
Kernel - mode
The standard mode is the regular mode of utility operation provided ROM can be read.
Kernel - mode is designed for writing/reading of FLASH ROM in cases, when ROM cannot be read, when ROM
firmware version does not correspond to service data version of the head-and-disk assembly or when ROM firmware
contains adaptive data that is not native for the drive. Kernel mode operation is further described in detail in a chapter
under the same title. (See part 15).
If the standard mode is selected, the utility reads drive ROM header, determines firmware version and adjusts itself
according to ROM configuration tables (table of modules, table of zone distribution, etc.). If ROM cannot be read the
following message is output:
Error reading ROM
You'll be offered to press [Enter] – and setup the utility using a file (containing previously read ROM data). You'll have
to indicate a file containing ROM firmware with a corresponding version1. Otherwise you should press [Esc] – and start
operating the utility with default parameters. If the ROM has been read but is not recognized by the utility, the
following message appears:
Unknown drive ROM firmware discovered (F/W=xxɯɯ)2.
Using default parameters.
You'll be offered to press [Esc] to leave or [Enter] to continue (in that case the utility may operate erroneously). Then a
list of basic family models will appear. After model selection and pressing [Enter] the program reads the drive's
configuration tables and verifies their conformity to physical parameters of the selected drive. If they match the
program will bring up the main operating modes menu:
Servo test
Surface scanning
Disk firmware zone
Drive ID
Formatting
Logical scanning
S.M.A.R.T. table
Defects table
Automatic mode
Exit
If there is no match, the following message appears:
Model adjusted according to the number of physically present heads.
It indicates that the basic model configuration has been changed.

5.1. Servo test


Servo test – prior to starting the test you'll have to define the test range and the limit for grouping into tracks, i.e. the
number of defective sectors, which would cause track removal as a defective one. The test is run track-by-track
separately on each surface. The test is performed according to physical parameters and zone allocation. The testing
procedure measures the time of decoding for all the servo fields on the current track and the obtained value is shown on
a respective diagram. If servo fields are faultless the time for their decoding will be equal for all tracks of the disk. The
diagram in that case will look like a straight or slightly stepped line. If servo fields of some track turn out to be corrupt,
their decoding time will increase drastically. The diagram will show a spike in the corresponding section. The greater
part of servo fields is corrupt the higher the spike is. If the number of intact servo fields on a track is insufficient for
support of stable spindle speed the corresponding spike will be marked yellow. Pressing [Esc] during the test will
interrupt the measurement for current surface and skip to measuring the next surface. After measurement completion a

1
ROM version number can be seen on HDA label, see Chapter 11
2
if: ɯɯɯɯ=FFFF, ROM has been read but it could not be recognized;
ɯɯɯɯ=0000, ROM could not be read.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 3
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

table containing numbers of defective sectors and tracks is output, with every record accompanied by a respective error
code. If an error code is missing, the defect was recorded after the critical time had run out. Pressing [Enter] will move
all the discovered defective sectors to the PL table and defective tracks – to the TS1 table. If there is no need to hide the
defects, please press [Esc].
During servo test surfaces are formatted track-by-track. That is "physical" formatting unlike logical format
procedure (accomplished, for instance, during factory formatting), therefore in order to perform further drive testing,
i.e. to carry out subsequent scanning of surfaces for physical parameters compliance, you'll have to run servo test from
the beginning to the end of the user data zone on every surface. And vice versa, for testing of the drive's logical
parameters you'll have to accomplish factory formatting without errors.

5.2. Surface scanning.


Surface scanning allows to estimate the quality of magnetic surfaces, functional condition of magnetic-head assembly
and discover and isolate all defective sectors and track. Prior to the test start you'll see the following setup screen:
Initial cylinder: xxxx
Final cylinder: xxxx
Passes: 3
Retries of a defect: 3
Critical time (ms): 300
Perform writing test: No
Test all heads: Yes
Limit of grouping into tracks: 4
Initial and final cylinders determine the test range.
Passes parameter defines the number of complete test passes from the initial to the final cylinders. The input
range is from 1 to 100.
Retries of a defect parameter determines the test reaction to errors. The test is performed track-by-track and if
an error is discovered the test proceeds to sector-by-sector analysis of such track. The number of repetitions for the
analysis is defined by the "retries of a defect" parameter. In order to increase the test speed during the first pass the
index equal to 1 is always suggested (the value input by the operator is used during all subsequent passes). The index
value range is from 1 to 10.
Critical time means the wait period for reading (and writing) operations. If the set limit is exceeded, the sector
is considered to be defective. Input range is from 40 ms to 999 ms, the default value is 300 ms. The critical time value
should be decreased very cautiously. Setting a value, which is too small (it depends upon specific drive, the testing
computer, etc.) may lead to detecting false errors. Besides the drive periodically performs re-calibration procedure,
which can also be interpreted as an error.
Perform writing test (No/Yes) – if the writing test is set on the testing quality will be slightly better, but it
almost doubles the test duration. Switching writing on/off is performed by the keys [Y] – Yes and [N] – No or [Space].
Switching the writing test on is recommended for individual defective surface parts with an indication of the test range.
After the surface test procedure is performed the table containing all the detected physical defects represented
in PCHS (Physical CHS) notation appears on the screen. Pressing the [Enter] key moves all the defects to the PL
defects table. Formatting procedure should be performed after that.
Test all heads (Yes/No) – test can be performed for some of the heads. That is achieved using the No option.
Switching is executed by the keys [Y] – Yes and [N] or [Space] – No. Then the heads that are to remain untested
should be defined. This mode is used for preliminary estimate of the magnetic surfaces condition, if a large number of
errors on such surface(s) impedes performing the test.
Limit of grouping into tracks (cylinders) is a parameter determining the number of defective sectors in a track
that will cause the whole track to be isolated as a defective track or cylinder. By default the maximum values are set.
For the MPG-AT/H/E families a track containing more than 63 defective sectors is considered to be defective and
hidden as a track defect. For the MPF-AT family a track containing more than 63 defective sectors causes the whole
cylinder to be considered defective.
This test must be preceded by servo test! After the surface test procedure is performed the table containing
numbers of defective sectors and tracks appears on screen. Pressing the [Enter] key records the defective sectors into
the PL table, and the defective tracks - into the TS one (for the MPF3xxxAT family into the CS). Transformation into
tracks is performed according to the LIMIT OF GROUPING INTO TRACKS parameter (for the MPF3xxxAT family –
into cylinder defects).
The test setup menu contains recommended parameters by default.

1
- In the MPF3xxxAT family defective tracks are recorded to the CS table and hidden as cylinder defects.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
4 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

5.3. Disk firmware zone.


Disk firmware zone option allows reviewing and testing the disk hardware structure, which is stored in the ROM and on
the disk service tracks, to rewrite completely the ROM and the disk service data recorded in tracks, as well as to
reconfigure the drive. This command brings the following menu on screen:
Work with ROM
Work with disk firmware zone
Heads deactivation
Spindle stop
Work with adaptive data
Work with ROM – accomplishes writing, reading and the drive’s ROM viewing operations:
Review of the disk firmware zone in ROM - displays the microprogram header from the drive ROM and the
module catalogue on the screen. The microprogram header shows version (Firmware Revision), version for HDA
(HDA Hardware Revision), code generation date (Date), name of the family (Family), ROM checksum (Checksum),
and availability of the adaptive data (Adaptives) as follows and byte Flags represented in hexadecimal mode:
(C) FUJITSU . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F/W : 80C24E04
F/W HDA : 82-80C2
Data : 29/01/2001
Family : PB-16E HIMALAYA
Checksum : 480D31C6
Flags : 81
The module catalogue shows the modules used in the current microprogram. If the utility does not recognize
the microprogram version (with a corresponding message at utility start), then the module catalogue and the zone
allocation table are assumed by default depending on the selected model at the utility start.
Read ROM into file command performs reading of the ROM contents into a file with the *.bin extension.
When this operation is selected the file name should be input without extension. The read file is placed into the current
\PC3000\ subdirectory. This operation can be executed for a completely functional drive only, and cannot be performed
for a separate PCB.
Write ROM from file – performs writing the drive ROM from a file. If this operation is selected the file with
*.bin extension located in the PC3000 subdirectory should be indicated. As soon as the file is chosen, the writing
process starts. During the procedure the drive spindle motor stops, the ROM microcircuit is programmed, after that the
drive RESET, the spindle motor spinning up and recalibration are executed, and the drive reports on readiness. If for
some reason the writing procedure was not accomplished or was performed incorrectly then the spindle motor will not
start and you'll see an error message on screen.
There is a great diversity of firmware versions in the MPF-AT and MPG families, and at that the majority of
them are incompatible. To some extent it is caused by the manufacturer’s efforts to fix errors1, as well as by differences
in the construction of HDA within the same family, more specifically - in the construction of the magnetic-head
assembly and servo information. An attempt to create a correspondence table for firmware and PCB versions and HDA
types failed because of their immense number (please see Chapter 11 on compatibility between firmware and HDA).
Writing the ROM can be performed to a PCB without HDA in Kernel mode. It is possible in case when the
ROM microcircuit’s checksum doesn’t match its reference value (when the ROM firmware is corrupt or if the ROM
microcircuit is empty). If the ROM microcircuit’s checksum matches the reference value, then writing the ROM is
possible on an assembled and set on readiness disc only. But a situation is possible when by mistake a firmware version
inappropriate for the board is recorded, then the disc is unable to report on readiness. In such case the board only
without its HDA is connected to PC-3000 and prior to switching on the power supply any two of the data lines (I/O) of
the ROM microcircuit have to be short-circuited with tweezers (see picture of the package types at the end of the
Fujitsu HDD description), after turning power on the tweezers should be removed. At that the checksum of the ROM
will not match, and the board gets set on readiness immediately, then the utility can be loaded in Kernel mode and a
corresponding firmware version can be written. Please see Chapter 15 to learn about this procedure in detail.
Supported ROMs – output the information about the ROM versions connecting up into the utility and ROM
versions which are located at this moment in configurational file Fujitsu.ini. As required the user of the utility can
connect up by himself the ROM into the ini-file, in case discovering a new versions of ROM. This procedure is
described in details in part 18.
Work with disk firmware zone – accomplishes operations with disk service data stored on service tracks:

1
There is firmware update software (see http://www.fel.fujitsu.com/home/drivers.asp?L=en&CID=1).

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 5
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Disk service data check. Selection of this command brings the following list of basic modules on screen:
SN (Serial number) module – contains the drive's serial number;
HS (Head Select) module – contains the total number of heads and numbers of the used ones;
TS (Track Skip, for MPG-AT/H/E) module – drive's table of defective tracks;
CS (Cylinder Skip, for MPF-AT) module – drive's table of defective cylinders;
PL (Primary List) module – drive's table of defective sectors;
FI (Factory Information) module – contains information on production cycle. Of all the data the utility displays just
the date of drive manufacture.
CI (Components Information) module – contains information about HDA components: magnetic discs (MEDIA),
heads (HEADS), preamplifier/commutator microcircuit (HD-IC), spindle motor (DCM);
ZP (Zones Plan) module – contains information on allocation of zones;
SM (Security Master) module – contains information about master password;
SU (Security User) module – contains information about user password.
Following the list of basic modules a list of FIRMWARE MODULES is output as follows:
# ID Name Length Output Identification
where:
# - module number;
ID – module descriptor;
Name – module key name;
Length – module length in sectors;
Output – result of module reading;
Identification – result of module header comparison.
Resource – is a place of pickup the module: HDA from service zone and ROM from the RAM of the pcb. At
correct initialization of HDD the modules from service zone is copying in RAM of pcb. If the HDD has reading of
service information problems (errors in HDA strikes) the value in the strike ROM will show errors (modules errors in
RAM), except the modules which are loaded in RAM by defaults from ROM.
Drive service data writing/reading. This command records all the necessary data into the disk service zone. It
is necessary to re-write the service data if it is corrupt or if drive’s electronic circuit board was replaced during repair
(or ROM program was changed) and the version of microprocessor control program of the new board is incompatible
with the resident HDA microprogram. In order to write the service data you should select the menu option “WRITE
FIRMWARE FROM DATABASE TO DISK”, ROM version and appropriate service data version. You'll be offered to
write to drive’s RAM or to disk service zone. In order to accomplish a flawless writing the service data should first be
written to RAM, and only then to disk. Upon completion of writing to the disk it is necessary to switch off/on drive
power supply, clean the PL and TS (CS) tables of defects and switch off/on the drive power supply again. In case
you use PC-3K PWR adapter the whole switching procedure is performed automatically.
Attention! The utility checks whether the service data matches the version of ROM being recorded to. In case
of mismatch a notification will appear with an offer to write compatible modules only. In such case even after
successful writing completion an error message will appear on screen.
This utility enables the user to create and supplement a firmware database. In order to add a new firmware version to
the database you'll have to connect a good drive with that firmware and select the («ADD FIRMWARE TO
DATABASE») option; then the processor firmware version and model name should be input, for example: 82-80C2
MPG310AT. If firmware has been added with errors it can be deleted using the option «REMOVE FIRMWARE
FROM THE DATABASE».
Attention! If the utility recognizes the ROM1 it works with the list of modules taken from the drive ROM
during subsequent service data writing and reading. But it is possible that some of the modules have not been recorded
by the manufacturer on an absolutely functional disk. In that case the utility will notify about module absence and offer
to stop the writing/reading operation or to continue. If it is known a priori that the drive being read is good then the
operation may be continued, for it will be accomplished correctly. Such peculiarity of work is caused by certain
confusion at the manufacturing plant. For example, the ROM modules' list contains module ID=00h, however, there is
no such module in actual drives, therefore utilities block it.
Modules reading – the operation allows reading the drive hardware data in the order of its storage in HDD service
zone. Read modules are placed in a respective subdirectory (see Table 5.3.1):

1
If the utility could not recognize the drive ROM all the operations are performed with a reduced set of default
modules.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
6 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Table 5.3.1
Family Utility name Subdirectory for work with modules
MPG3xxxAT/E Pcfujmpg FUJMODGA
MPG3xxxAH/E Pcfjmpgh FUJMODGH
MPF3xxxAT Pcfujmpf FUJMODF
TAU, MPA-MPE, All Arh. MB9000 utilities FUJ_MOD
MPF3xxxAH
The name for every read file is generated as follows:
~PR ID NAME.rpm, where:
~ - the symbol identifying a firmware module;
PR – module type, 01 - module from the disc, 02 – module from RAM, Hex byte;
ID – module’s descriptor, Hex byte;
NAME – file name, it can contain from 2 to 3 ASCII symbols.
For example: ~010csm.rpm – means master password module SM read from disc; ~0204hs.rpm – HS module (heads
selection) read from RAM.
Prior to execution of modules reading operation a list of modules available for reading appears on screen, where you
should pick up any specific module or the «ALL MODULES» option using the [SPACE] key. In the latter case all the
service data modules are read into respective subdirectories (see table 5.3.1). If a subdirectory already contains modules
with the same names, the reading procedure will overwrite them without warning.
Modules writing – the operation allows to write a service data module (or modules) to the drive's service zone
or RAM. Prior to execution of this operation a list of modules in the modules work subdirectory (see Table 5.3.1)
available for writing appears on the screen, where you should pick up any specific module or the «ALL MODULES»
option using the [SPACE] key. In the latter case the utility offers to select writing modules to disk or to RAM, where all
the modules located in a respective subdirectory will be subsequently written.
Attention! During the writing process the utility doesn’t check module’s structure, therefore it is necessary to
exercise extreme caution while using this operation otherwise the disk can become irreversibly damaged.
Translator recalculation – that menu option is meant for restoration of static translator part (DM module) on
the basis of the PL table. Complete translator restoration also requires to provide for accuracy of its dynamic part (TS
module).
Safety subsystem – allows viewing set passwords and resetting them without corrupting user’s data if needed.
Log cleanup – it allows to perform the cleanup of modules containing the list of errors which HDD have
found during the work. These modules are 27h, 28h, 2Dh (FA), 31h(RE), 32h(WE), 70h and for the families MPG-
AT/AH additional modules 51h ɢ 52h.
Heads deactivation performs software deactivation of defective drive heads, inverse operation is also possible.
Prior to switching-off make sure that there are no records about heads being deactivated in the defects table, otherwise
the defects table should be reset first. When the heads deactivation mode is selected the table of used heads appears on
screen and you are prompted to switch the defective heads off or to switch operable ones on. After entering this mode
the blinking cursor appears at the first head. Press the [Space] key to switch the head off/on, and [Enter] - to move to
the next one. Press [Esc] to cancel this mode. Any head can be switched off, unless a restriction exists in the family.
Attention! After software heads de/activation it is necessary to switch off/on drive power supply and reboot the
utility! In case of software heads de/activation drives automatically change model name after reboot, with the exception
of nonstandard models (please see Chapter 14).
Spindle stop commands to stop the drive spindle. This mode is used during performance of HOT SWAP
boards replacement and might be used in the process of user’s data recovery.
Work with adaptive data offers two modes – "adaptives transfer" and "adaptives matching".
Adaptives transfer menu option serves for copying the adaptive data from one file to another. No actions are
performed with the connected drive. The pop-up window allows to select the type and name for source adaptive data
file and the destination file. The file type is determined by the location of adaptive data block in it. There are two
defined file types: "ROM file" and "module file". In case of work with ROM file the adaptives are located at offset
FDE0h. In case of work with the module 20h the adaptives are located at file beginning. After input of all the necessary
parameters the utility will perform actual transfer of 512 bytes of the adaptive data from one file to the other.
Adaptives matching menu option is designed to search for adaptive data matching the current drive in the
existing file set. In order to work with a drive you'll have to find a firmware that would quite promptly (in less than 1
min.) set the drive on readiness without knocking sounds. Files with adaptive data should be located in the ADP_DIR
subdirectory of the utility directory. In the process of work the utility will sequentially load adaptives from source files

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 7
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

to drive RAM and attempt to read module 20h from disk surface. If reading operation is successful the report will
include the name of the file containing adaptives that allow to read module 20h and the name of the file to which the
20h module has actually been read. You can break the matching process at any time by pressing [ESC]. In such case, as
with completion of matching all the source files, you'll see a brief report (containing a list of successful operations only)
on performed works. A complete report that allows to find out, which files have been processed but did not match,
names of matching adaptive data files and downloaded 20h modules can be found in the file ADP_DIR\adp_find.log.

5.4. Drive ID.


Drive ID option outputs to screen the drive ID. Actually you can modify its serial number only. You should press
[Enter] to enter new parameters or [Esc] if the ID has to remain unchanged.

5.5. Formatting.
Formatting option starts the native format procedure (Low-Level Format). Prior to the formatting procedure the drive
will erase the translator tables, check the defects tables for quantity and accuracy and start the actual formatting
process, when the drive skips defective sectors and defective tracks, the numbers of which it reads from the defects
table. The formatting procedure cannot be interrupted since after its completion a recalculation and translator recording
takes place. If format ends in error it means presence of corrupt servo information or incorrectly compiled defects table
(illegal values or values exceeding limits), in such case the drive's translator will not be recalculated, which will render
impossible its work using the logical parameters. Therefore it is recommended to save in a temporary file the service
data prior to formatting start to allow its subsequent restoration. Formatting takes approximately 20 minutes, but it
depends on the model, condition of magnetic disks and can increase considerably for defective surfaces.
Formatting error can appear immediately after the formatting procedure begins in case of incorrect PL and TS
(CS) tables' contents. For instance, that happens if some heads were switched off in the process while the PL and TS
defects tables contain left-over notes about defects for deactivated heads. That will be indicated in PL and TS tables by
the difference between the total number of defective sectors and their total amount for the remaining heads. In that case,
it is necessary to reset the tables of defects.
You should remember to group defective sectors into tracks. The following threshold values are allowed for MPG
drives:
- the number of P-LIST records does not exceed 5200;
- the number of defective sectors in one track does not exceed 63;
- consecutive chain of track defects in TS does not exceed 128 cylinders.
If an error occurs the contents of drive's registers is output on the screen. In some cases the information can be
useful, thus the 04h (ABRT) formatting error indicates incorrectly created PL, TS (CS) tables of defects, for example,
containing more than 63 defects per track. In that case the registers 1F4 and 1F5 will contain the defective cylinder
number and 1F6 – head number. Formatting error 18h means corruption of servo information; registers 1F3 - 1F6
contain LBA, where a corrupt servo field has been discovered. The information can be used for drive capacity
restriction from the end.

5.6. Logical scanning.


Logical scanning option starts the defects detection procedure utilizing logical parameters in LBA. The following setup
menu appears on the screen before the test beginning:
Initial LBA position 0
Final LBA position xxxxxxxx
Reverse scanning No
Passes 3
Retries of a defect 3
Critical time (ms) 100.
Perform writing test No
Verification instead of reading Yes
Initial and final LBA position parameters determine the test range.
Reverse scanning defines testing direction. Switching is performed using the [Y] key for "Yes" and [N] for
"No" or [Space]. A drive reads data ahead therefore direct scanning is somewhat faster than reverse.
Passes parameter determines the number of complete test passes from the initial to final LBA. Input range is
from 1 to 100.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
8 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Retries of a defect parameter determines the test reaction to errors. The test is performed block-by-block in
LBA notation and if an error is discovered the test proceeds to sector-by-sector analysis of such block. The number of
repetitions for the analysis is defined by the "retries of a defect" parameter. In order to increase the test speed during the
first pass the index equal to 1 is always suggested (the value input by the operator is used during all subsequent passes).
The index value range is from 1 to 10.
Critical time – determines latency time of performing the operations read (or write). If this period is exceeded
the sector is considered defects. The limitation of inputs are 10ms up to 999 ms, by defaults parameters it is indicated
100 ms. The reducing of critical time should be performed very carefully. Too small value of critical time (depends of
the model of HDD, concrete model of pc where the test is performing) can caused the faulse error. Moreover,
periodically the HDD is performing termocalibration and this can be considered as error.
Writing can be switched on in the test and verification procedure can be replaced with reading. Testing
quality in such case improves, but its duration increases, too. Switching writing on/off and substitution of reading
instead of verification is done using [Y] key for "Yes" and [N] for "No" or [Space]. The surface test is based on an
adaptive algorithm – detected defects are not addressed during subsequent passes. This procedure considerably
decreases test duration for drives with a large number of defects. Please keep in mind that testing duration depends
heavily on the number of defective sectors in a drive: the greater their number is the longer the test will run.
Upon completion of surface scanning procedure, the table of all discovered logical defects in LBA notation
appears on the screen. Pressing [Enter] key translates all logical defects into physical ones and displays them on the
screen; second pressing [Enter] appends all the defects to previous records in the PL table. After that the formatting
procedure should be performed.
The test setup menu contains recommended parameters by default.

5.7. S.M.A.R.T. table


S.M.A.R.T. table allows to view and reset S.M.A.R.T. drive parameters, and to load parameters from an external file:
View S.M.A.R.T. table. This command allows viewing S.M.A.R.T. drive parameters. You can read about S.M.A.R.T.
in details in the PC-3000-AT tester description. In the drive S.M.A.R.T. table is located in 09h, 0Ah, 0Bh modules.
Attributes are stored in 09h module and thresholds - in 0Ah module.
S.M.A.R.T. parameters reset – this command returns all the attributes to initial values except some of them. For
example, relocated defects attribute resets in case of successful formatting and recalculation of translator’s tables while
the spindle spin up time attribute is calculated every time the power supply is switched on. The attributes reset doesn’t
work with some drives, in such case you can use S.M.A.R.T. external module loading option.
Load S.M.A.R.T. (external module) – this command allows to load a value from some external file with the *.sma
extension containing the “reset” attributes to the 09h module.

5.8. Defects table


Defects table – allows to view, to add, to regroup or cleanup the defects table.
View defects table. This command allows to view the table of relocated defects of the drive. First the TS track
defects are displayed (for MPF-AT family – cylinder CS), followed by the sector PL. In the MPG-AT/H/E families
defects are represented in the tables by heads in PCHS (Physical CHS) and ordered by cylinders and sectors. In the
MPF-AT family defects aren’t ordered by heads, they are in the same list, but sorted by cylinders, heads and sectors.
While viewing the table the total number of drive defects is indicated (and for MPG-AT/H/E the number of defects
ordered by heads). Viewing the tables of defects allows to estimate the quality and condition of the magnetic disks used
in the drive.
Add LBA defect. This command adds a logical defect in LBA notation, which was detected, for example, by a
PC-3000AT or Defectoscope utility. After addition all logical structure defects are translated into physical notation and
placed into the defects table. Formatting is required after adding defects to the table.
Add LCHS defect. This operation is similar to the previous one with the exception of defects input, which is
performed using logical parameters in CHS notation. Please keep in mind that logical CHS mode’s limitation is 8 Gbt.
Add physical sector. The operation allows to input physical defective sectors manually. This command is
necessary to input a supposed defect, which couldn’t be discovered during surface scanning. For example, on
completion of SURFACE SCANNING the following defects appeared in the table:
Cyl: 745 Sec: 46
Cyl: 747 Sec: 46
Cyl: 748 Sec: 46

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 9
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

The records demonstrate that the defect is a scratch, but the table contains no records on cylinder no. 746, where sector
46 supposedly should be defective. It is recommended to add such defects to the table. Formatting is required after
adding defects to the table.
Add physical track (cylinder). The operation allows to enter physical defective tracks (cylinder for MPF-AT)
manually.
Group into tracks (cylinders). This menu item allows to group into defective tracks those defective sectors,
which already are entered into the PL defects table. When you enter the mode the message: LIMIT OF GROUPING
INTO TRACKS appears, and you are prompted to input the threshold value above which sector defects are to be
grouped into defective tracks (cylinders) and added to the TS (CS) table.
Group tracks into cylinders- it allows to regroup track defects into cylinders (only for the family MPG-
AT/AH). In this connection all tracks defects which are in the table TS must be automatically copied by all heads of
defective track. Such operation allows to hide defects better.
Import of logical defects table. This command allows to add values from a *.bad file to the defects table. Such
file can be prepared, for instance, by PC-DEFECTOSCOPE software. The pcdefect.bad file structure is described in the
manual for the PC-DEFECTOSCOPE utility. After adding the defects formatting procedure must be performed (please
see Chapter 5.5).
Clear defects table. You'll be offered to reset the defects table(s). After the execution of this command the
selected defects table(s) is cleaned-up – the number of defective sectors is made equal to zero. In case of TS (CS) table
erasing it is necessary to switch off/on the drive power supply to force reloading of dynamic tables; if you use PC-3K
PWR adapter the operation is performed automatically.

5.9. Automatic mode.


Automatic mode allows to scan the drive automatically without operator intervention. When this mode is selected two
lists appear on the screen: TASKS LIST and AVAILABLE TASKS. Before the testing starts a test program must be
created or a previously created one loaded.
Attention! Operation in automatic mode for Arh. ARM7 families does not differ from that for Arh. MB9000
families therefore please consult the automatic mode description for Arh. MB9000.

6. Brief technical description of ARM7-based families of Fujitsu drives.


The main difference between ARM7-based drives and previous MB9000-based drive families is manifested in
the presence of resident loaded complementary code for the controlling microprocessor. Therefore a mechanism of
firmware modules' loading directly to drive RAM via IDE interface has been implemented in those drives. Thus, in
cases of service data corruption the modules first have to be loaded to RAM and only then recorded to disk.

6.1. MPF3xxxAT family


The manufacturer's specification defines this family as Picobird-15 (PB-15).
Table 6.1.1
Family Basic model Capacity Number Number Phys. Sect./track Logical cyl. ROM
of disks of heads cyls param, hds, sect.1 label
MPF3204AT 20,4 Gb 2 4 19680 352-624 16383, 16, 63
MPF3xxxAT MPF3153AT 15,3 Gb 2 3 19680 352-624 16383, 16, 63 PFT
MPF3102AT 10,2 Gb 1 2 19680 352-624 16383, 16, 63

6.1.1. Disk space organization in MPF3xxxAT family drives


Logical disk space is represented in the Table 6.1.1. In all the models their full capacity is available in LBA
mode only since the minimum capacity of manufactured drives is 10 Gb. As with previous families MPF3xxxAT drives
provide for an opportunity to limit the logical disk space (please see Arh.MB9000-based drives description).
Physical disk space structure is shown in the Figure 6.1.1. The drives utilize the principle of zone-sector writing,
at that the whole disk space is divided into 15 zones. It is necessary to pay attention to the initial cylinder of the user's
data zone. Unlike the previous families, in the MPF3xxxAT family the operating zone begins with the 0 cylinder
corresponding to the logical zero cylinder.

1
- full capacity available in LBA mode only.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
10 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8


000...1199 1200...3479 3480...4799 4800...5759 5760...6719 6720...7559 7560...8999 9000...10319
624 sec 600 sec 588 sec 576 sec 576 sec 560 sec 544 sec 528 sec

Zone 9 Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15


10320...11879 11880...12599 12600...13799 13800...15359 15360...16919 16920...18239 18240...19680
504 sec 492 sec 480 sec 448 sec 420 sec 396 sec 352 sec
Fig.6.1.1. Disk space structure of MPF3xxxAT drives.
The firmware zone is inaccessible in an apparent form and is represented by modules, available through their
identification numbers (ID). Those modules contain essential configuration tables of the drive, and unlike previous
drive families, also resident microcode for the controlling microprocessor in the module identified as 3Dh.
During initialization that module is loaded to HDD RAM, and along with ROM it forms the drive controlling
microprogram. Module 3Dh is registered as ROM (it has a corresponding header), and an absolute version match
between that module and ROM firmware is an essential condition. If module 3Dh has not been loaded into RAM the
drive cannot be operated, besides, the commands of modules writing/reading in the disk service zone do not work. In
such case it is necessary to load hardware data into drive RAM first, and then write the data to the drive hardware zone.
Modules are handled through their road map located in the ROM microcircuit on the control board. In case if the
ROM version has not been recognized (modules road map has not been found) then operations with hardware zone are
performed by default in accordance with the following table:
ID Length Name ID Length Name ID Length Name
01 78 DM 10 4 SCH 27 1 none
02 41 PL 11 1 SEQ 28 1 none
03 1 CS 12 2 WTP 2D 1 FA
04 1 HS 13 1 END 30 1 ZP
05 1 FI 14 1 ECT 31 8 RE
06 16 DT 15 64 ERR 32 8 WE
07 1 SI 16 32 SVE 35 1 none
08 1 SN 17 8 TAM 3D 44 none
09 1 none 18 1 DPT 70 30 none
0A 1 none 1A 1 CS
0B 1 none 1B 41 PL
0C 1 SM 1C 4 RRO
0D 1 SU 1D 32 none
0E 1 CI 1E 1 none
Capacity of the PL sector defects table is 5247 defects as sum total for all surfaces. Capacity of the CS cylinder
defects table is 253 defects as sum total for all surfaces. Unlike other drive families, the MPF3xxxAT family utilizes
cylinder-by-cylinder defects relocation instead of a track-by-track procedure. One more peculiarity of that family is
manifested in its combined organization of defects tables, i.e. contrary to other Fujitsu drive families the tables are not
recorded separately for each head.
As it has been stated above, unlike the previous Arh. MB9000 families the firmware contained in ROM on the
control board of the Arh. ARM7 HDD family is insufficient for drive operation. A part of microprocessor code
necessary for drive operation is located in the drive service zone, and loaded during initialization into RAM for
subsequent use of the code. Therefore, if drive hardware data is corrupt, performance of a writing procedure requires
loading of hardware data into RAM first with its further writing onto the drive. Please see Chapter 11 of this manual
for details on microcode compatibility.
External view of MPF3xxxxAT control board is shown in Fig. 6.1.2.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 11
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

CA21246
-B76X

28F1101T
HA13626

PFT
1 3

W981616AH

1. 20.0 MHz
2. BA3946
3. TA7BM08F
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Cable Select Slave Present
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
Fig.6.1.2. External view of MPF3xxxxAT control board.
Translation from LCHS or LBA into actual physical representation is achieved in the same manner as in the MPE
drive family. One distinctive feature is the initial cylinder in the user's data zone. The said zone in the MPF3xxxxAT
family starts from cylinder 0, which corresponds directly to the logical zero cylinder.

6.1.2. Modification of drive configuration


Drive model in this family is defined according to the heads selection table (HS module). During initialization the
table is read, and the drive is set up as a specific model depending on the number of used surfaces, please, see Table
6.1.2 and Figure 6.1.3. The basic models of the manufacturer are shown in italics, regular font means monosurface
model obtained by switching on just 1 operating head. Setting drive up as such a model requires modification of
module ID=3Dh, please see Chapter 14 for details.
Table 6.1.2.
Family Model Number of surfaces
MPF3204AT 4
MPF3153AT 3
MPF3xxxAT
MPF3102AT 2
MPF3102AT 1

H3
H2
H1
H0

Fig.6.1.3. Disks arrangement inside the package.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
12 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Reconfiguration can be performed from the top downwards by switching off defective surfaces and magnetic
disks. Besides, not only top surfaces can be switched off but also those in the middle of the package. Junior models are
thus created from the top ones. In case of configuration modification the model name, logical drive parameters and
translator’s operation are set up automatically. Monosurface model is an exception, and requires updating of module
ID=3Dh. Upon completion of configuration modification it is necessary to switch the drive power supply off/on in
order to initialize such drive with new parameters, and reload the utility, selecting a basic model at utility start.

6.2. MPG3xxxAT/H/E family


The family is constituted by four subfamilies: Picobird-16 (PB-16), Picobird-16E (PB-16E), Picobird-16H (PB-16H),
and Picobird-16HE (PB-16HE). They differ by recording density and consist of various listed models (please see Table
6.2.1.).
Table 6.2.1
Family Basic models1 Capacity Number Number Phys. Sect. / Logical cyl. ROM
track param, hds, label
of disks of heads cylinder sect
2

PB16 MPG3307AT 30.7 Gb 2 4 28928 357-630 16383, 16, 63 PGT8


MPG3409AT 40.9 Gb 2 4 30784 441-789 16383, 16, 63
PB16E MPG3204AT 20.4 Gb 1 2 30784 441-789 16383, 16, 63 PGT8
MPG3102AT 10.2 Gb 1 1 30784 441-789 16383, 16, 63
PB16H MPG3204AH 20.4 Gb 2 4 19423 352-608 16383, 16, 63 PGT8
MPG3102AH 10.2 Gb 1 2 19423 352-608 16383, 16, 63
MPG3409AH-E 40.9 Gb 2 4 30784 456-736 16383, 16, 63
PB16HE MPG3307AH-E 30.7 Gb 2 3 30784 456-736 16383, 16, 63 PGT8
MPG3204AH-E 20.4 Gb 1 2 30784 456-736 16383, 16, 63

6.2.1. Disk space organization in MPG3xxxAT/H/E family drives


The full capacity of all models in this family is available in LBA mode only. Just as with the previous families,
MPG3xxxAT/H/E provides for an opportunity to limit the logical disk space (see technical description of
Arh.MB9000-based drive families). In such case setting a jumper between the 1st and the 2nd pins (see fig. 6.2.5.) in the
MPG3102AT/H/E, MPG3204AT/H/E, and MPG3307AT/H/E models imposes capacity limitation of 2.1 Gb, and in
MPG3409AT/H/E model the limitation is 33.8 Gb.
Physical disk space structure for Picobird-16 (PB-16), Picobird-16E (PB-16E), Picobird-16H (PB-16H), and
Picobird-16HE (PB-16HE) subfamilies are shown in the figures 6.2.1.-6.2.4 respectively. Those drives use the
principle of zone-sector writing with subdivision of all the disk space into 15 zones. The initial cylinder of the
operating zone starts from the cylinder 0, which corresponds directly to the logical zero cylinder.
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8
0...2655 2656...5311 5312...6527 6528...9151 9152...11839 11840...13823 13824...15743 15744...18751
630 sec 630 sec 601 sec 588 sec 567 sec 546 sec 525 sec 504 sec

Zone 9 Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15


18752...19583 19584...21887 21888...24191 24192...25631 25632...27039 27040...28895 28896...28927
483 sec 462 sec 441 sec 420 sec 399 sec 378 sec 357 sec
Fig.6.2.1. Disk space structure in drive: MPG3307AT.
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8
0...3231 3232...5727 5728...9055 9056...11071 11072...13055 13056...15743 15744...17663 17664...20031
798 sec 777 sec 756 sec 720 sec 702 sec 672 sec 648 sec 630 sec

Zone 9 Zone 10 11Zone Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15


20032...22335 22336...23999 24000...25375 25376...27135 27136...28799 28800...30431 30432...30784
588 sec 567 sec 546 sec 518 sec 504 sec 468 sec 441 sec

Fig.6.2.2. Disk space structure in drives: MPG3409AT, MPG3204AT, MPG3102AT.

1 - produced by the manufacturing plant.


2
- full capacity is available in LBA mode only.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 13
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8


0...1215 1216...2431 2432...3743 3744...4831 4832...5823 5824...7743 7744...9631 9632...10815
608 sec 608 sec 608 sec 600 sec 588 sec 576 sec 544 sec 528 sec

Zone 9 Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15


10816...12351 12352...13951 13952...15231 15232...16287 16288...17823 17824...19071 19072...19423
496 sec 480 sec 448 sec 432 sec 400 sec 384 sec 352 sec

Fig.6.2.3. Disk space structure in drives: MPG33204AH, MPG3102AH.

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8


0...2783 2784...5567 5568...8351 8352...11263 11264...13439 13440...16095 16096...17983 17984...19839
736 sec 736 sec 736 sec 736 sec 720 sec 684 sec 672 sec 640 sec

Zone 9 Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15


19840...22175 22176...23583 23584...25087 25088...26719 26720...28575 28576...29951 29952...30783
608 sec 588 sec 576 sec 544 sec 512 sec 492 sec 456 sec

Fig.6.2.4. Disk space structure in drives: MPG3409AH-E, MPG3307AH-E, MPG3204AH-E.

The firmware zone is inaccessible in an apparent form and is represented by modules, available through their
identification numbers (ID). Those modules contain essential configuration tables of the drive, and unlike previous
drive families, also resident microcode for the controlling microprocessor in the module identified as 3Dh.
During initialization the module is loaded to HDD RAM, and along with ROM it forms the drive controlling
microprogram. Module 3Dh is registered as ROM (it has a corresponding header), and an absolute version match
between that module and ROM firmware is an essential condition. If module 3Dh has not been loaded into RAM the
drive cannot be operated, besides, the commands of modules writing/reading in the disk service zone do not work. In
such case it is necessary to load hardware data into drive RAM first, and then write the data to the drive hardware zone.
Modules are handled through their road map located in the ROM microcircuit on the control board. In case if the
ROM version has not been recognized (modules road map has not been found) then operations with hardware zone are
performed by default in accordance with the following table:

ID Length Name ID Length Name ID Length Name


01 81 DM 10 1 SCH 20 6 none
02 41 PL 11 1 SEQ 27 1 none
03 13 TS 12 2 WTP 28 1 none
04 1 HS 13 1 END 29 10 SH
05 1 FI 14 4 ECT 2D 1 FA
06 18 DT 15 128 ERR 2E 5 none
07 1 SI 16 32 SVE 30 1 ZP
08 1 SN 17 8 TAM 31 8 RE
09 1 none 18 1 DPT 32 8 WE
0A 1 none 1A 13 TS 35 1 none
0B 1 none 1B 41 PL 36 51 SH
0C 1 SM 1C 5 RRO 3D 52/56 none
0D 1 SU 1D 36 none 40 1 none
0E 1 CI 1E 1 none 41 1 none
1F 7 REC 50 2 none
51 9 none
52 9 none
60 14 SR (used irregularly)
70 0 none

Capacity of the PL sector defects table is 5243 defects as sum total for all surfaces. Capacity of the TS cylinder
defects table is 3319 defects as sum total for all surfaces.

As it has been stated above, unlike the previous Arh. MB9000 families the firmware contained in ROM on the
control board of the Arh. ARM7 HDD family is insufficient for drive operation. A part of microprocessor code

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
14 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

necessary for drive operation, is located in the drive service zone, and loaded during initialization into RAM for
subsequent use of the code. Therefore, if drive hardware data is corrupt, performance of a writing procedure requires
loading of hardware data into RAM first with its further writing onto the drive. Please see Chapter 11 of this manual
for details on microcode compatibility.
External view of MPGxxxxAT/H/E control board is shown in Fig. 6.2.5.

1
1
2

1. HA13627
2. DI758
3. LE28F1101T-40
Jumper Configuration
Master Slave Cable Select Slave Present
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
Fig.6.2.5. External view of MPG3xxxAT/H/E control board.

6.2.2. Modification of drive configuration


Drive model in this family is defined according to the heads selection table (HS module). During initialization the
table is read, and the drive is set up as a specific model depending on the number of used surfaces, please, see table
6.2.2 and figure 6.2.6. The basic models of the manufacturer are shown in italics, regular font means monosurface
model obtained by switching on just 1 operating head. Setting a drive up as such a model requires modification of
module ID=3Dh, please see Chapter 14 for details.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 15
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Table 6.2.2.
Family Model Number of surfaces
MPG3307AT 4
MPG3153AT 3
PB16
MPG3153AT 2
MPG3153AT 1
MPG3409AT 4
MPG3102AT 3
PB16E
MPG3204AT 2
MPG3102AT 1
MPG3204AH 4
MPG3102AH 3
PB16H
MPG3102AH 2
MPG3102AH 1
MPF3409AT 4
MPF3307AT 3
PB16HE
MPF3204AT 2
MPF3102AT 1

H3
H2
H1
H0

Fig.6.2.6. Disks arrangement inside the package.


Reconfiguration can be performed from the top downwards by switching off defective surfaces and magnetic
disks. Besides, not only top surfaces can be switched off but also those in the middle of the package. Junior models are
thus created from the top ones. In case of configuration modification the model name, logical drive parameters and
translator’s operation are set up automatically. Monosurface model is an exception, and requires updating of module
ID=3Dh. Upon completion of configuration modification it is necessary to switch the drive power supply off/on in
order to initialize such drive with new parameters, and reload the utility, selecting a basic model at utility start.

7. Repair of ARM7-based Fujitsu drives.


Repair of drives belonging to MPF-AT and MPG families has some peculiarities compared to preceding
MB9000-based drive families. They include the presence of resident microprocessor code, a large number of
incompatible firmware versions, factory errors in code (especially in models dated by the year 2000) as well as
differences in the HDA construction and service data structure even in the same models with different dates of
manufacture. All of the above complicates initial fault diagnostics and selection of control board for replacement in
case of its malfunction. Still, for malfunction search one can employ the methods suggested for Fujitsu drive families of
preceding generations.

7.1. Hardware repair.

7.1.1. Structure chart.


The circuit design of Fujitsu drives reviewed in this manual is very similar, all models are based on HIMALAYA
integrated chip. Various families differ by their cache buffer capacity, data storage density, etc. The MPG3xxxAT drive
structure chart is represented in Figure 7.1.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
16 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

Console I/F (RS232C)


Himalaya 2.0
CL-SH8671
40.0 MHz
Switch
MCU
ARM7TDMI

Flach ROM
RDC
64K x 16 bits
CL-SH3515

ATA HDC
Series Termination SH7661 Head IC SVC
I/F SR1756 HA13627
- PIO Mode-4
- Multiword DMA Mode-2 R/W SPM/VCM
- Ultra DMA Mode-2 (66.6 MB/s) control
- Ultra DMA Mode-2 (100 MB/s) Buffer Bandwidth = 160.0 MB/s

Data Buffer
256K x 16 bits
or
1024K x 16 bits

Figure 7.1 MPG3xxxAT drive - structure chart.

7.1.2. Initialization.
The drive initializes itself at power-up:
1. Power-up.
2. Self-diagnostics 1:
- data bus and MPU address test;
- writing/reading test of microcircuit registers via internal data bus;
- internal RAM writing/reading test.
3. Spindle motor start-up.
4. Self-diagnostics 2:
- buffer RAM writing/reading test.
5. Stabilizing the spindle motor rotation speed.
6. Heads release from latch (magnetic heads' unparking).
7. Service data reading.
8. Recalibration start.
9. Setting itself in readiness mode (ATA command waiting).

7.1.3. Microcircuitry malfunctions.


1. Flash ROM malfunction. Problems with Flash ROM circuit in MPF-AT and MPG are considerably less frequent than
in previous families. However, data corruption or erasure still can happen to Flash ROM microcircuits. The board in
such cases demonstrates "no signs of life" or the drive operation may look erratic. Diagnostics of such malfunction
requires reading the Flash ROM contents and its subsequent comparison to a reference value. If the drive starts
operation and sets itself on readiness Flash ROM can be read through the utility option WORK WITH ROM. If the
drive does not set itself on readiness then the ROM contents can be read in Kernel mode only or in a ROM programmer
having unsoldered the ROM circuit first.
Attention! When you compare the Flash ROM contents to the reference value, keep in mind that the last 512
bytes of ROM contents are adaptive HDA data and they are individual for the specific drive model. That’s why
during comparison their contents may turn out to be different.
2. VCM (voice coil motor) & SPM (spindle motor) controller malfunction (HA13626 in MPF-AT, HA13627 in MPG.
Hitachi Semiconductors, the manufacturer of those microcircuits, doesn’t distribute their description. HA13626
microcircuit is quite fail-safe and if there are no evident signs of its overheating then most likely it is functional. The

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 17
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

HA13627 microcircuit is used in MPG families and frequently enough suffers from the substrate separation defect and
local overheating of the crystal. With such malfunction the drive spins up normally, sets on readiness, operates, and
after a while the spindle motor stops. (it’s a defect similar to TDA5247HT microcircuit of the Quantum drives).
3. Integrated chipset (CL-SH8669 in MPF-AT and CL-SH8671 in MPG family), contains the ARM7TDMI processor,
CL-SH3515 reading/writing channel (the microcircuit was used separately in MPF-AH drives) and CL-SH7661
interface controller. This circuit is the weak spot of MPF-AT and (especially) MPG drives, it causes 90% of troubles
with those drives. The malfunction becomes apparent after circuitry heating (especially in summer period) during
writing cycles. As a rule in such cases a drive corrupts its own firmware modules. One can indirectly judge about the
microcircuit operability by activity in data bus lines, connected to ROM and buffer RAM chip. If there is none you
should check the presence of power voltage and clock generation or a steady "RESET" signal. Complete check of
integrated chipset requires drive testing in PC-3000AT in cyclic mode with writing set on for at least 3 full passes. If a
drive malfunctions, hangs (does not report readiness), erases firmware modules, then the circuit is defective. In some
cases this can be corrected by microcircuit unsoldering, solder alloy replacement on board pads and the circuit, flushing
the residue of old fusing agent and subsequent soldering the microcircuit back with obligatory flushing.

7.2. Software repair.

7.2.1. Drive restoration algorithm.


The basic distinction of these families from the previous ones is manifested in a wide diversity of incompatible
firmware versions and service data versions. And more, even similar ROM versions have an area of 512 bytes at the
end, containing adaptive data (i.e. firmware adjustments for a specific HDD model). That leads to incompatibility even
between similar ROM versions, causing both common operation slow-downs during reading and even knocking sounds
during initialization. Thereat during the diagnostics of the drive by the method of the substitution of the printed circuit
board of the operable HDD it is essential to reprogrammed ROM of the working pcb using the firmware of the
diagnosed one.
Depending on the condition of the drive being repaired its restoration may require some specific operations.
For example, if at power-up the drive doesn’t spin up the spindle motor, or spins it up and stops, then most probably the
defect consists in malfunction of the electronics board, which needs a repair. If spindle motor spins up, but instead of
recalibration sounds you hear monotonous strokes of the positioner hitting against the limit stop, then the defect
indicates incorrect drive servo system operation and may arise from:
- ROM version incompatible with HDA (see Chapter 11 for more details);
- malfunction of the head-and-disk assembly preamplifier-commutator microcircuit located inside HDA;
- malfunction of HDA;
- heavy corruption of servo fields or a shift of magnetic disks' package after an impact (one sign indicating that
the drive took an impact is greater noise of spindle motor operation and case vibration).
In any of these cases excepting the first one, software restoration of such drive is impossible.
If after switching power on the drive spins up the spindle motor and unparks the magnetic heads, but while
entering the PC-3000AT program generates the ABRT (04h) error, or errors appear one after another while reading
drive surfaces, then it means that the drive can’t read hardware data from the disk. That kind of defect may arise from:
- data reading/translation channel malfunction;
- servo modules corruption (see Chapter 9 for more details);
- incompatibility between the hardware data version and the firmware recorded in the control board ROM (read
more about that in Chapter 11).
In such case ensure that the control board is functional (the best variant is the method of the substitution), the ROM and
HDA versions are compatible, and begin the hardware data restoration from step 1.
If after switching power on the drive initializes, recalibrates, and its drive ID is read, but testing reveals BAD sectors,
then the restoration should be started from step 2.
1. To restore service area (SA). The HDD restoration procedure is:
a) To perform Check firmware structure and determine the damaged modules. If only part of modules is damaged
you can overwrite it, using the technique described in chapter 9.
b) If the HDD has the most of damaged modules, including the overlay module 3Dh you should write the modules
into the RAM first and only then into the disc.
c) Switch the drive power supply off/on to reinitialize it.
2. Cleanup:
- Defects table PL, TS (CS);
- erase the logs;

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
18 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

- reset SMART.
3. Run SERVO TEST. During testing a track-by-track surface formatting is performed, the testing procedure measures
the time of decoding for all the servo fields on the current track and the obtained value is shown on a respective
diagram. When the test is complete the table containing the number of the defective sectors appears on the screen.
Pressing the [Enter] key will write all the defective sectors into the PL-table, and defective tracks into the TS (CS)
table. Servo test shouldn’t be interrupted and must be accomplished from the beginning to the end.
4. Run SURFACE SCANNING. The test checks physical parameters. When the surface test procedure is complete a
table containing the number of defective sectors appears on the screen. Pressing the [Enter] key will write all the
defective sectors into the PL-table, and defective tracks into the TS (CS) table.
5. To perform the group of tracks into the cylinders (only for the family MPG-AT/AH).
6. On completion of the tests 3 and 4 according to their results make a conclusion about the necessity of switching
some surfaces off. For example, you can switch off the surfaces with extensive servo corruption, or surfaces containing
maximal number of defects. After surfaces deactivation it is necessary to switch the drive power supply off/on and
restart the program, having selected a new model at utility start, and proceed with hardware restoration from step 2.
7. Perform low-level (factory) format procedure, which should be accomplished successfully. If formatting ends in
error you should repeat steps 3, 4, and 5.
8. Run LOGICAL SCANNING procedure performed in LBA format. It is possible to switch writing off and perform
verification instead of reading to speed up testing considerably, see Chapter 5. When the surface scanning procedure is
over the table of all discovered logical defects in LBA notation appears on screen. Pressing the [Enter] key translates
logical defects into physical and displays them on screen; second pressing [Enter] key appends all the defects to the PL
table. After that step 8 should be performed. If the logical scanning didn’t detect any errors, then proceed with step 9.
9. Perform low-level (factory) format procedure, which should be accomplished successfully.
10. Record serial number to drive ID if necessary.
11. Run PC-3000AT COMPLEX TEST. If an error is discovered, repeat steps 7 and 8.
12. Run PC-3000AT COMPLEX TEST and make sure the drive is fully functional.

7.2.2. Tests' duration.


Tests' duration is shown in the Table 7.2.2. and corresponds to testing in a Celeron-466 PC.
Table 7.2.2.1
Test2 MPF3102AT MPG3102AT
Servo test 20 min 10 min
Surface scanning 45 min 30 min
Formatting 15 min 10 min
Logical scanning 40 min 25 min

8. Special utility files for Fujitsu drives.


The utilities' complex contains besides the main files also auxiliary service files. Their names match the
utility’s name while their extension corresponds to the file type:
/utility’s name/.rsc – microprogram recourses' database file used for hardware data writing/reading and
included in the supplied kit;
/utility’s name/.log – text file for the drive test results generated by the utility at the first program launch and
appended with every subsequent drive test. The file contains all the settings and test results. Data on the automatic drive
test performance is also recorded to this file;
/utility’s name/.sma – file contains the reset SMART attributes, and acts as a service module (ID=09h) image.
It is used in the SMART parameters reset operations.
Other file names are selected by user, but their extensions are determined by the utility depending on their
types:
*.tsk – task file, which is used for settings’ saving in automatic test mode;
*.bin – file contains firmware for the drive’s ROM, and it is created during firmware reading from ROM;

1
- average testing duration is indicated, it can increase considerably if defects are numerous.
2
- with default test setup parameters.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 19
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

*.rpm – technological files of the drives' resident firmware modules. During the reading procedure they are
copied to their respective directory (see Table 5.3.1).
*.log files can be viewed as regular text files; *.bin files can be viewed as binary files.

9. Restoration of hardware modules in the MPF-AT and MPG families.


A defect of hardware data modules is a frequently occurring fault in these families (especially in MPG). The
malfunction manifests itself as follows: the drive spins up the spindle motor, re-calibrates itself and outputs the ABRT
error. And the most unpleasant thing is that it happens absolutely unexpectedly, especially for the user and the user’s
data.
Diagnostics of such malfunction requires to select the "HARDWARE DATA STRUCTURE TESTING" mode
in the "HARDWARE DATA/OPERATIONS WITH HARDWARE" menu, and to inspect which modules are defective
in the "PROGRAM MODULES" table. You can also do it in a different manner. Select the "MODULES READING"
mode from the "OPERATIONS WITH HARDWARE" menu and read all the modules from the drive. Then it is
necessary to exit the utility and view lengths of the read modules. If the length of some modules is equal to 0, then
consequently these modules are defective, and it is necessary to re-write them. Modules ID=01h, 09h, 27h, 2Dh, 31h,
32h, 36h, 60h1, and 70h suffer from corruption most frequently.
Some of the modules are critical for data protection and should not be overwritten if you wish to preserve the
user's data, for example, the modules 01h (DM), 03h (TS/CS) and 06h (DT). The DM module contains a table of
exceptions, TS (CS) module contains the track (cylinder) defects' dynamic table, the DT module contains translator and
represents a link between the logical space, defects table and drive's physical space. The remaining modules are not so
critical, and may be re-written, but it is recommended to copy them from the same HDD model with the same hardware
version, for example, the modules ID=01h (DM), 04h (HS), 3Dh. Some modules can be copied from any suitable drive,
namely: 08h, 09h, 0Bh, 0Ch, 27h, 2Dh, 31h, 32h, 36h, 51h, 52h, 60h1, 70h, however in 95% of cases corruption
influences not the whole list but just a part of it. As a rule, the problem is in modules of logs 51h, 52h, 70h, while all
the rest cause errors because of those three malfunctioning modules. Rewriting those three modules automatically
restores the rest.
Anyway, prior to starting the drive restoration it is necessary to save all the modules and the ROM
firmware to have an opportunity to reverse the changes.

10. ROM data structure in MPF-AT and MPG drive families.


Flash ROM firmware data structure of these families differs from the previous ones. First of all, it is due to
their 32-bit CPU (compared to the 16-bit CPU used in previous families).
Table 10.1 represents the firmware structure in ROM, and Fig. 10.1 demonstrates its header.
Table 10.1
Address Length Purpose
0h 32 bytes Keyword: (C) FUJITSU ………………………………
20 h 4 bytes Firmware version
24 h 4 bytes Version date
28 h 2 bytes Reserved
2A h 1 byte Version prefix
2B h 1 byte Mutex byte (presence of adaptive data, heads' map and disks' map.)
2C h 4 bytes Checksum for the whole ROM including adaptives but without header
30 h 16 bytes ASCII family name
… … ….
… … ….
1FDE0 h 512 bytes Adaptives (checksum adjusted and equal to 0)
1FFE0 h 32 bytes Keyword: (C) FUJITSU ………………………………

1
Module 60h is not used in several models, so it can be left without re-writing.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
20 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

00000: 28 43 29 20 46 55 4A 49 54 53 55 20 2E 2E 2E 2E (C) FUJITSU ....


00010: 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E 2E ................
00020: 80 B5 B6 03 20 00 11 27 00 00 A9 A1 1C 12 4C 50 ȭµ¶ ' ©ȸ LP
00030: 50 42 2D 31 36 45 20 48 49 4D 41 4C 41 59 41 20 PB-16E HIMALAYA
Fig. 10.1 Firmware header in ROM.
The loaded firmware portion has a similar header, the so-called overlay. It is located in the disk hardware zone in the
module ID=3Dh, and loaded to the HDD RAM during initialization. The essential condition is an absolute match
between the overlay version and the ROM firmware version. The overlay doesn’t contain adaptives, and may have
different length depending on its version. Its last 32 bytes contain the keyword “(C) FUJITSU.......” (see the Table
10.1).

10.1. Mutex byte in ROM.


Mutex byte is located at offset 2Bh from ROM beginning and consists of 8 bits. The bits' meanings are as follows:
D7 – sign of adaptives' presence in ROM, but the bit does not influence anything, it's purely informative;
D6, D5 – heads' table used for hardware data loading;
D4 – purpose unknown. Usually = 0;
D3 - purpose unknown. Usually = 0;
D2 - purpose unknown. Usually = 0;
D1, D0 – binary presentation of disks' number in a drive.
If ROM is re-written from a database during drive repair please note the values of D6, D5, D1, and D0 bits. The rest are
either set to 0 or influence nothing. For example, single-disk MPG3102AT model uses head 0 and its hardware data
contains adaptives, therefore the mutex byte should read as follows: 10100001 = A1h. If the same model uses head 1,
then it will look like: 11000001 = C1h. In case of MPG3204AT model with adaptives we have A1h, model
MPG3307AT without adaptives is represented by 02h.
Meaning of D6 and D5 bits:
D6, D5 = 0 0 – a drive with two heads (it can also have two disks, see description of D1, and D0);
D6, D5 = 0 1 – a single-head drive with operating head 0;
D6, D5 = 1 0 – a single-head drive with operating head 1.
Meaning of D1 and D0 bits:
D1, D0 = 0 1 – single-disk drive;
D1, D0 = 1 0 – double-disk drive.
If bits D6 and D5 = 0, it is assumed that hardware data loading begins with head 0, i.e. values: 01h (81h) and 21h (A1h)
are similar for model MPG3102AT.

11. On compatibility between ROM firmware and HDA service data in


MPF-AT and MPG drive families (boards compatibility).
The hardware data version written in HDA can be found on the drive label. Version number is indicated in its
right lower corner, below the line REV.NO. A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (see fig. 11.1) and consists of a prefix (3 characters)
and a version number (4 characters) written through dash.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 21
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Figure 11.1. Fujitsu drive label. Version number A9-80B5.


The first prefix character denotes the month of drive manufacture in hex notation and is of no importance for
compatibility. Therefore if you wish to determine exactly the ROM version that has to be recorded for current HDA
you should check 4-byte ROM version number in ROM dump and note its first byte and also note the prefix byte. Thus
you'll have a 6-character number of a required ROM version (see. Table 10.1 and Figure 10.1). For example, in this
dump the ROM version will be A9-80B5.
If a drive sets itself on readiness you can review ROM firmware version using a corresponding utility (see
Chapter 5.3) or else you can read the board ROM in Kernel mode (see Chapter 15).
The match of the version’s number shown on HDA, and the ROM firmware version number doesn’t
necessarily mean a trouble-free match between the HDA and the current ROM version. First, you should check in ROM
(and correct, if necessary) the mutex byte (see Chapter 10). You should also take into account the presence of
adaptives. Actually the adaptives – individual HDA program settings – are recorded in ROM of some single-disk
models. They are calculated during servo fields recording on a Pushpin-free STW (Servo Track Writer)1. That means
that use of a board other than native may cause "alien" adaptives to be recorded to ROM. It may lead to poor reading
quality, slow work of such drive or even "fidgeting" or heads knocking during initialization. However, it is quite
possible to pick up a board with suitable ROM firmware for a specific HDA. The examples can be as follows:
1. A drive board is damaged and needs to be replaced.
To accomplish that you can take a similar functional board and solder the ROM from the damaged board onto
the new one. It is possible to unsolder the ROM from the damaged board, read its contents in a ROM programmer and
write it to the new board without HDA (see Chapter 15 on this procedure). Any of these operations produces a
completely functional drive with a “native ROM”.
2. A drive doesn’t have its “native” board.
Such situations are possible in the following cases: a. If the board ROM is malfunctioning; b. If the board is
lost; c. If the HDD has already been repaired and it’s difficult to determine whether the board is “native” or not.
Whatever the case is, first of all it is necessary to record the corresponding ROM version without its adaptives (i.e. to
write the code 00h from the address 1FDE0h to the address 1FFE0h up to the line “(C) FUJITSU”). If you have a MPF-
AT or MPG-AH/AHE or a double-disk MPG-AT family drive the compatibility procedure can be considered complete
(none of those families uses adaptives). The new installed board will work normally with drive HDA.
If you have a single-disk MPG-AT (MPG3102AT or MPG3204AT) model its HDA may contain adaptives.
So, if the actions above lead to "fidgeting sounds" during initialization you should use the adaptives' selection method
described in Chapter 17. The method is reading the contents of the module ID=20h. Its first 512 bytes are a copy of the
adaptives, which should be written to the ROM beginning with the address IFDE0h. Reading the adaptives and writing
them to ROM allows to produce a completely functional drive.
3. A drive doesn’t have its “native” board, and its hardware zone is defective or re-written.
That situation is the most complicated; being similar to the previous one with one exception: the module ID=20h
either cannot be read, or is “alien”. In such case you should also use the adaptives' selection method, but the probability
of 100% match of selected adaptives is extremely low. Most likely you'll succeed in picking up proper adaptives, but
the drive will be really unstable operating very slowly and with eventual seek errors.

12. Data saving peculiarity in MPF-AT and MPG drive families.


The problem is caused by existing variety of hardware data and ROM firmware versions. Besides, drive adaptives
in these families are stored in ROM, that is why it is so important to save the “hardware data+ROM” set. Moreover, the
adaptives make such a set strictly dependent on the model (the number of physically present heads). In this connection
it is recommended to create a subdirectory called, for example, MPG, and generate subdirectories: PB16, PB16E,
PB16H and PB16AHE in it, in order to place there ROM and hardware data of specific models in the corresponding
families. An example of such structure is represented in Figure 12.1.

1
- adaptives are recorded both to ROM and service data module 20h on disk.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
22 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

C:\
PC-3000
ROM
DATA
MPG
PB16
PB16E MPG3102A.001
FUJMODGA
PB16H
pcfujmpg.rsc
PB16AHE
rom.bin
readme.txt
MPG3102A.002

MPG3204A.001

Figure 12.1. Sample directory structure for hardware data storage.


It is necessary to save ROM contents and resource file of a given model, and all the read modules (arranged into
directories according to Table 5.3.1). It is also possible to generate a text file containing necessary notes.
The saved settings would be sufficient both for complete drive repair, and for restoration of individual modules
thereof.

13. Password disabling.


The problem of the ATA disk passwords disabling can arise in case when a user has set a password on the drive
and has forgotten it, or when a password has been set by a malicious virus program. In the first case you might view the
password in the “DISK SERVICE DATA CHECK” mode (see Chapter 5.3). In the second case unprintable ASCII
characters (belonging to the 20h – 7Fh range) are frequently used. That is why the “SAFETY SUBSYSTEM” mode in
the utility provides for a password resetting option (see Chapter 5.3).
Both of these modes are available in the menu “WORK WITH DISK FIRMWARE ZONE”.

14. Patching the module ID=3Dh in non-standard models of MPF-AT,


and MPG drive families
The heads capacity miscount (understatement) problem often appears after software heads switching off in Fujitsu
drives. This problem is related to the capacity evaluation routine used in the Fujitsu drive firmware. Every firmware
contains Max LBA values for all manufactured modifications of a given model (in that case modifications are
understood as drives with a different number of heads). They are stored in a table and indexed specifically depending
on the HDA active heads number. Thus, you have to correct the corresponding section of that table in case of heads
over-commutation into a model which is not manufactured by Fujitsu (for example, an MPF AT model with 1 head).
The procedure of searching this table in the original (previously uncorrected) module ID=3D is very simple: you
should search for the sequence of values, claimed by the Max LBA parameter. For example:
Drive Fujitsu MPF AT (PB15)
Standard heads set: 2 3 4
Value Max LBA (Dec) 20015856 30023280 40031712
Value Max LBA (Hex) 1316AF0 1CA1E70 262D5E0
Searching for sequence: F0 6A 31 01 70 1E CA 01 E0 D5 62 02

Drive Fujitsu MPG AT E (PB16E)

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 23
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Standard heads set: 1 2 4


Value Max LBA (Dec) 20015856 40031712 80063424
Value Max LBA (Hex) 1316AF0 262D5E0 4C5ABC0
Searching for sequence: F0 6A 31 01 E0 D5 62 02 C0 AB C5 04

Drive Fujitsu MPG AT (PB16)


Standard heads set: 2 4
Value Max LBA (Dec) 30023280 60046560
Value Max LBA (Hex) 1CA1E70 3943CE0
Searching for sequence: 70 1E CA 01 E0 3C 94 03
Commentary: in the module 3Dh the data is located in Intel’s format (higher significant byte of data is located in higher
address.)
The values of addresses of searching table is noted below:
Model: MPG AT E (PB16E) Model: MPG AT (PB16)
(F/W HDA) Address (F/W HDA) Address
: :
80 C2 4E 04 (82-80C2) 31A0 02 B5 AD 03 (30-02B5) 4370
82 B5 C1 02 (09-80B5) 31A0 02 B9 D8 03 (00-02B5) 30BC
80 B5 B6 03 (A9-80B5) 314C

Model: MPF AT (PB15)


(F/W HDA) Address
00 28 8B 00 (06-0028) 2C80
The LBA values correction procedure has some peculiarities for different models. See detailed description in the
following sections.

14.1. Fujitsu MPF-AT (PB15).


Let's assume that we need to produce a single-head model. We modify the lowest section for a model with 2
heads. In the process of recalculation we have to bear in mind that besides dividing the corresponding number by 2 we
need to reserve some disk space for the drive’s service needs (1-2 cylinders). So, for MPF AT we obtain the value
equal to 979218h, consequently we record the number 18 92 97 00 into the said section.

14.2. Fujitsu MPG-AT E (PB16E).


Let's assume that we need to produce a model with 3 heads. In that case we have to change the section,
corresponding to the single-head modification. This model does not require to reserve disk space for the drive’s service
needs, we just increase the Max LBA parameter of the single-head modification by three times.

14.3. Fujitsu MPG-AT (PB16).


Since the table for this model contains just 2 sections (for modifications with 2 and 4 heads), we need to write the
Max LBA values for modifications with 1 and 3 heads into the section for the double-head modification. In that case
during new Max LBA calculation we should reserve certain disk space for the drive’s service needs (1-2 cylinders).
Let’s make an example:
Heads quantity Capacity Mb Max LBA (Dec) Max LBA (Hex) Value for recording
1 7314 14979072 E49000h 00 90E4 00
3 21942 44936704 2ADAE00h 00 AE AD 02

14.4. Fujitsu MPG-AH (PB16 AH), Fujitsu MPG AHE (PB16 AH E).
Unfortunately we haven’t tested them in the absence of such drives.

Note:

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
24 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

At this point we correct just the number returned by a drive as its maximum capacity value. The model’s name
(for example, MPG3204AT) remains unchanged (incorrect). Actually the number in the model name is stored in the
ID=3D module as a line recorded in several places, that are varied for different hardware, and their exact identification
is not possible yet - thus modification may pose a threat of code damage. Theoretically, if someone wants to take a
chance, one should look for the last 3 figures of identifier (for example, 204).

15. ROM reading/writing to PCB without a HDA (kernel - mode).


The need for reading or writing of ROM data without HDA arises when the disk hardware version and the ROM
firmware version do not match. Installation of a PCB with a different firmware version to the HDA leads to drive's
inability to report on readiness; thus ROM cannot be written using regular methods provided in the respective utility.
Here the microprocessor factory mode and its internal code – KERNEL CODE – can be helpful. The code allows to
write ROM firmware without a HDA connected to the PCB. One peculiarity of its work is that the processor at start-up
reads the ROM code and attempts to calculate a correct checksum, and if it does not match the CPU will enter the
kernel mode that allows to perform ROM writing or reading.
If ROM already contains valid firmware (with a different version) its checksum will match, of course. To force
the PCB into kernel mode you will need to short circuit two data lines on the ROM chip with tweezers and switch
power on the PCB. That will start the PCB in Kernel mode making it report on readiness immediately (DRDY and
DSC LEDs will be illuminated). After that you may remove the tweezers.
Actions summary:
1. Remove the PCB from HDA and connect PCB to PC-3000 interface and an external1 power supply, which
must be off.
2. Short circuit two data lines on ROM chip with tweezers (ROM chip pins arrangement is detailed in the end of
Fujitsu Arh. MB9000 description).
3. Start a corresponding utility and select Kernel - mode.
4. Power-up the drive. The PCB should immediately report on readiness (DRDY and DSC LEDs must be
illuminated). If that doesn't happen repeat steps 2-4 having short-circuited other data lines.
5. Then you can proceed with ROM writing or reading operations.
Fujitsu drives utilize several types of Flash ROM chips - SGS Thomson, Sanyo, etc. If you experience difficulties
during work in Kernel – mode (which are especially apparent with Sanyo chips) you should try to short circuit other
data lines while entering the mode. A potential problem is manifested in distortion of Flash ROM chip parameters used
for adjustment of algorithms applied for subsequent operations with the chip. You can also prepare a temporary file
containing just 00 values and record it first. After that at power-up the PCB will automatically switch to Kernel mode,
since the checksum will not match. Then you'll be able to record required data. Writing must be followed by a reading
operation so that you make sure (using files comparison) that the writing procedure was successful.

16. Translator recalculation.


The menu option is meant for restoration of static translator part (DM module) using the PL table as basis. A
similar procedure is performed by the low-level format command after successful surface formatting. Achievement of
complete translator's restoration requires also to provide separately for the dynamic part accuracy (TS module). It is
recommended to save all service data module prior to translator recalculation.

17. Work with adaptive data.


Adaptives are individual HDA settings calculated during servo fields recording on a Pushpin-free STW2
(Servo Track Writer). MPG3xxxAH/AHE drive families do not have adaptive data. MPG3xxxAT drive family also
uses adaptives just in some models, for example double-disk MPG3409ȺɌ and MPG3307AT contain no adaptives. In
general, adaptives are used in single-disk MPG3204AT and MPG3102AT models, though not necessarily. You can tell
whether a model uses adaptives or not having read the model ROM (please see Chapters 10 and 11).
There is a special menu offered for work with adaptives, it contains two options
Adaptives transfer
1
- an external power supply is recommended for that operation to make power switching on/off more convenient.
2
- sometimes also called Low-Cost Servowriter.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 25
Ɋɋ-3000 £
Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG ¤ ACELab

Adaptives matching
Adaptives transfer option serves for copying adaptive data from one file to another. No actions are performed with
the connected drive.
Utility pop-up window allows to select the type and name for source adaptive data file and the destination file.
The file type is determined by the location of adaptive data block in it. There are two defined file types: "ROM file" and
"module file". In case of work with a ROM file the adaptives are located at offset FDE0h. In case of work with the
module 20h the adaptives are located at file beginning. After input of all the necessary parameters the utility will
perform actual transfer of 512 bytes of the adaptive data from one file to the other.
Adaptives matching1 is designed to search for adaptive data matching for the current drive using the existing file
set and read the drive's module 20h with its "native" adaptive data.
Attention! The operation is automatic but a situation is possible when a drive may be damaged during
work with a loaded adaptives' block because of heads bouncing.
In order to work with a drive you'll have to find a firmware version that would quite promptly (in less than 1
min.) set the drive on readiness without knocking sounds. Of course, reporting on readiness does not mean that
anything can be read from such drive. It would be enough if at power-up it sets itself on readiness quickly (without
additional self-damage caused by intensive "knocking"), even without loading hardware data from disks. Files with
adaptive data should be located in the ADP_DIR subdirectory of the utility directory. There are three sources for
matching: ROM files (*.bin), files with module 20h (*.rpm), and adaptive data files (*.adp). *.adp files represent the
most space-saving variant of adaptives storage since the contain nothing more2. In the process of work the utility will
sequentially load adaptives from source files to drive RAM and attempt to read module 20h from disk surface. If
reading operation is successful the report will include the name of the file containing adaptives that allow to read
module 20h and the name of the file to which the 20h module has actually been read. You can break the matching
process at any time by pressing [ESC]. In such case, as with completion of matching all the source files, you'll see a
brief report (containing a list of successful operations only) on performed works. A complete report that allows to find
out, which files have been processed but did not match, names of matching adaptive data files and downloaded 20h
modules can be found in the file ADP_DIR\adp_find.log.

18. Addition of the new firmware ROM into the file Fujitsu.ini.
The utilities for the HDD Fujitsu families MPF-AT and MPG – AT/E/AH allows user to add new firmware
ROM, which he can find. A part of the firmware wired-in the utility body and another part is loading after the
initialization it from the module Fujitsu.ini. The addition of the unknown firmware into the utility allows to work
correctly with the modules of the HDD, which have such firmware. Otherwise the work will be by defaults parameters
and some inaccuracy in the head of modules, the length and the quantity of it is possible. To set the work of the utility
it is necessary to indicate the shift to the modules table in ROM.
The file of the settings of Fujitsu.ini editing:
[PB15_DIR] – section for MPF AT (PB15)
[PB16_DIR] - section for MPG AT (PB16) ɢ MPG AT-E (PB16E)
[PB16H_DIR] - section for MPG AH (PB16H) ɢ MPG AH-E (PB16HE)
Commentary – is a string which is beginning with symbol ";" .
The format of writing:
$xxxxxxxx=$yyyyyyyy ;zzzzzzzz
xxxxxxxx – full version of the firmware: F/W (4 byte from the shift 0x20 into ROM), for example: 000020: 80 B5 B6
03 – for the firmware F/W HDA : A9-80B5.
yyyyyyyy - hexadecimal shift of the modules table in ROM
zzzzzzzz - commentary
Example:
[PB16_DIR]

1
- The function requires presence of PC-3K PWR power supply controller.
2
- If adaptives have to be transferred from an “adp”-file to ROM file or a module 20h file (see paragraph “Adaptives
transfer”) rename an *.adp file to *.rpm and select in the corresponding menu "module" source type.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
26 www.acelab.ru
Ɋɋ-3000 £
¤ ACELab Fujitsu MPF-AT, MPG

$20070204=$0001D480 ;x00-2007
Researching of the modules table in new ROM should be perform by signature.
MPF AT : 01 00 4E 00 00 00
MPG AT : 01 00 51 00 00 00
MPG AH : 01 00 51 00 00 00
To view which firmware are switched on now you can by option:
Service info / Work with ROM / supported firmware.

19. Pcb circuit.

Technical support: eng_support@acelab.ru


(8632) 78-50-30, 78-50-40
www.acelab.ru 27

S-ar putea să vă placă și